(slurp_file): New function.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
404fa7d6
DL
1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
2Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
1fa28578
GM
11** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
12the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
13
14** There are new configure options associated with the support for
15images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option to list them.
16\f
17* Changes in Emacs 21.1
18
abfcc168
GM
19** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
20sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
21You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
22
cc181e95
GM
23** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
24on the display using several methods
25
26- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
27a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
28be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
29
30- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
31equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
32
33- By specifying `--line-spaceing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
34
35- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
36the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
37
0daee095 38** The new command `clone-buffer-indirectly' can be used to create
1c459486
GM
39an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
40command `clone-buffer-indirectly-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
41does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 42
176256a1
DL
43** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
44`make-backup-file-name-function' are provided to control the placement
45of backups, typically in a single directory or in an invisible
46sub-directory.
47
dd0add8e
DL
48** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
49characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
50
699238d9
GM
51** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
52compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
53this behavior.
54
55The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
56compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
57Emacs dump core.
58
59** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 60
7233c5bd
GM
61*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
62whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
63is useful for debugging X problems.
64
65Example:
66
699238d9 67 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 68
100b3cbb
GM
69*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
70visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
71the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
72and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
73visual class names are
74
75 TrueColor
76 PseudoColor
77 DirectColor
78 StaticColor
79 GrayScale
80 StaticGray
81
82Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
83`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
84meaning.
85
86The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
87supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
88`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
89visual.
90
91Example:
92
699238d9 93 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
94
95*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
96specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
97default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
98resource values are `true' or `on'.
99
100Example:
101
699238d9 102 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 103
0d0c76b8
EZ
104** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
105more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
106now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
107
42088c12 108** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 109display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
110shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
111be customized.
c60ea02e 112
31047e0d
DL
113** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
114
b02786f9
GM
115** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
116all frames except the selected one.
117
3261c1d8
DL
118** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
119to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
120
ffe36136
GM
121** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
122the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo
123area or with tooltips.
124
559cee90
DL
125** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
126read mail from the menu etc.
127
271b4185
GM
128** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
129a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
130
0daee095
GM
131** Changes in Texinfo mode.
132
133** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
134macros
135
136 Key binding Macro
137 -------------------------
138 C-c C-c C-s @strong
139 C-c C-c C-e @emph
140 C-c C-c u @url
141 C-c C-c q @quotation
142 C-c C-c m @email
143
559cee90
DL
144** Changes in Outline mode.
145
146There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
147`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
148the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
149
404fa7d6
DL
150** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
151groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
152
8964fec7
SM
153** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
154or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
155several other special buffers.
156
39783d73
WP
157** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
158under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
159.emacs file.
160
161The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
162determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
163
d35fce81
GM
164** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
165abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
166`directory-abbrev-alist'.
167
df5a1902
GM
168** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
169is running in batch mode. For example,
170
171 (message "%s" (read t))
172
173will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
174to standard output.
175
a933dad1
DL
176** Faces and frame parameters.
177
178There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
179Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
180`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
181`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
182sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
183for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
184parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
185
186Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
187`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 188`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
189`default' face and vice versa.
190
f77a4a8a
GM
191** New face `menu'.
192
193The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
194Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
195attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
196
a933dad1
DL
197** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
198
199The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
200colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
201correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
202the screen gamma of a frame's display.
203
204PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
205in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
206color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
207
208The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
209`ScreenGamma'.
210
211** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
212
213The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
214Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
215oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
216of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
217the text.
218
219** Emacs has a new face implementation.
220
221The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
222font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
223height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
224These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
225specify a font.
226
227Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
228These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
229under Lisp changes, below.
230
231** New default font is Courier 12pt.
232
233** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
234its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
235it is hollow.
236
237** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
238truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
239foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
240customizing face `fringe'.
241
242** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
243can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
244
245** LessTif support.
246
247Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
248need a version 0.88.1 or later.
249
250** Toolkit scroll bars.
251
252Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
253LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
254configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
255bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
256bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
257Emacs.
258
259When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
260Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
261Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
262Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
263define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
264`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
265
266Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
267a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
268directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
269different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
270system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
271add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
272
273The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
274`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
275This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
276image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
277Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
278
279** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
280
281When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
282widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
283Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
284
285** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
286
287When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
288whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
289defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
290highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
291displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
292whitespace.
293
294** Busy-cursor.
295
296Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
297display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
298
299** Blinking cursor
300
301M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
302terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
303and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
304the group `cursor'.
305
306** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
307
308This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
309generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
310See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
311details.
312
313Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
314have to do anything to activate it.
315
316** Tabs and variable-width text.
317
318Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
319defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
320independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
321Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
322
323** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
324
325*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
326
327 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
328
79dd1637
RS
329The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
330LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 331
79dd1637
RS
332*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
333LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1
DL
334
335** Hscrolling in C code.
336
cc181e95
GM
337Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
338`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
339customized.
a933dad1
DL
340
341** Tool bar support.
342
343Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
344how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
345
346** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
347
348Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
349mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
350line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
351about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
352in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
353
354Currently, the following actions have been defined:
355
356- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
357buffers.
358
359- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
360M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
361
362- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
363
559cee90 364- Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
a933dad1
DL
365toggles the read-only status.
366
367- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
368
369** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
370
371When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 372from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
373non-nil.
374
375** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
376
377Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
378Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
379the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
380italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
381Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
382attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored.
383
384** Sound support
385
386Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
387(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
388Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
389(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
390to enable sound support.
391
392** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
393the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
394forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
395value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
396users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
397even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
398
399The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
400
401** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
402
403As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
404drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
405`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
406
407** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
408bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
409
410This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
411`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
412variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
413
414** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
415
416When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
417value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
418number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
419fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
420
421When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
422value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
423number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
424fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
425
426** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
427notably at the end of lines.
428
429All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
430spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
431
eee54b0e
DL
432There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
433
a933dad1
DL
434** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
435query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
436after each match to get the replacement text.
437
438** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
439
440If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are
441longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is
442on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size
443by setting the following variable:
444
445- User option: max-mini-window-height
446
447Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
448fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
449specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
450
451Default is 0.25.
452
0d43b60d
GM
453** Changes to hideshow.el
454
455Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
456selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
457
458*** Generalized block selection and traversal
459
460A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
461(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
462which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
463`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
464point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
465(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
466
467If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
468i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
469backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
470the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
471
472*** Isearch support for updating mode line
473
474During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
475blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
476line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
477portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
478is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
479
480To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
481something like this in your .emacs.
482
483 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
484 (lambda ()
485 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
486
559cee90
DL
487** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
488
489If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
490entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
491log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
492
493New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
494buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
eb2aac9d
GM
495
496Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
497if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
498
499The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
500expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
501cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
502a file.
503
3476b54a
GM
504** Changes in Font Lock
505
506*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
507font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
508mode.
509
b3b98592
GM
510** Comint (subshell) changes
511
512Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
513and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
514
515The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
516buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
517buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
518
519The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
520M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
521the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
522
e26cec67
GM
523** Changes to Rmail mode
524
c0510d27
GM
525*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
526set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
527receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
528recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
529`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
530as correspondent.
531
532Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
533mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
534regexp matching your mail adresses.
535
3b55acc9
GM
536*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
537to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
538Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
539with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
540for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
541
6a1950ec
GM
542*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
543like `j'.
544
5bb6f079
RS
545*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
546specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 547digest message.
e26cec67 548
400a1ed0
GM
549** Changes to TeX mode
550
551The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
552`latex-mode'.
553
a933dad1
DL
554** Changes to RefTeX mode
555
556*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
557 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
558 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
559 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
560 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
561 can be edited from that buffer.
562
563*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
564 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
565 `A' to use all marked entries).
566
567*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
568 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
569
570*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
571 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
572 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
573 been cited.
574
38de9631
GM
575** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
576The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
577semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
578in column 1 are always made leaves.
579
a933dad1
DL
580** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
581has the following new features:
582
583*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
584may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
585to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
586time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
587
588*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
589feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
590file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
591compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
592pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
593defaults to 1.
594
595** Tooltips.
596
597Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
598mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
599can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
600
601Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
602variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
603the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
604tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
605
606** Customize changes
607
608*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
609`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
610cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
611
612*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
613Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
614default).
615
0ae51efb
GM
616*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
617between custom options. Example:
618
619 (defcustom default-input-method nil
620 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
621 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
622 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
623 :group 'mule
624 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
625 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
626
627This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
628current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
629first in a custom-set-variables statement.
630
a933dad1
DL
631** New features in evaluation commands
632
633The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
634modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
635print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
636customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
637eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
638
a933dad1
DL
639** Dired changes
640
641*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
642command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
643is, delete only empty directories.
644
645*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
646command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
647copy directories recursively.
648
f6737cde
GM
649*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
650in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
651the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
652
a933dad1
DL
653** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
654use the -f option when sending mail.
655
b1c609b1
GM
656** CC mode changes.
657
658Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
659current user setups (although it's believed that these
660incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
661However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
662back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
663compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
664release.
665
666*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
667When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
668variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
669take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
670is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
671settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
672possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
673Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
674
675By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
676special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
677the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
678of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
679above.
680
681Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
682when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
683function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
684call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
685then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
686values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
687only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
688function documentation for more info.
689
690The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
691especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
692with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
693intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
694such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
695is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
696configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
697global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
698
699(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
700
701**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
702This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
703
704This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
705variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
706completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
707the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
708empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
709style system.
710
711**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
712In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
713c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
714as far as possible.
715
716*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
717CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
718surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
719chapter about this in the manual.
720
721**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
722The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
723recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
724primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
725adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
726
727**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
728This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
729c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
730
731**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
732This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
733
734It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
735Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
736A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
737inside CC Mode.
738
739Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
740causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
741the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
742available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
743cc-mode/).
744
745**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
746The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
747specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
748literals.
749
750**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
751It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
752prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
753you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
754this function.
755
756*** Fixes to IDL mode.
757It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
758to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
759struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
760Thanks to Eric Eide.
761
762*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
763It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
764opening braces hangs and when they don't.
765
766**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
767
768*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
769See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
770better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
771and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
772
773*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
774previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
775the column specified by comment-column.
776
777*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
778In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
779is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
780prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
781contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
782don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
783
784*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
785instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
786arguments.
787
788*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
789
790*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
791c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
792c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
793variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
794Provan).
795
796*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
797
c407c570
GM
798** Makefile mode changes
799
800*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
801
802*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
803Fontlock mode is active.
804
87be76f6
GM
805** Isearch changes
806
c407c570
GM
807** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
808respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
809that started the search.
810
87be76f6 811*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
812selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
813
87be76f6
GM
814*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
815
d35fce81 816Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
817`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
818search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
819before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
820highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
821`secondary-selection'.
822
823The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
824will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
825Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
826using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
827usual snappy response.
828
829If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
830matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
831set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
832isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
833
35384f06
GM
834** Changes in sort.el
835
836The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 837as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
838new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
839numeric base.
87be76f6 840
d7b511c4
GM
841** Changes to Ange-ftp
842
843*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
844names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
845sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
846
d7b511c4
GM
847*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
848ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
849
4b9347b3
GM
850** Shell script mode changes.
851
852Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
853derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
854sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
855
79214ddf
FP
856** Etags changes.
857
858*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
859
aca0be23 860*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
861possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
862{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
863This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
864a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 865
79214ddf
FP
866*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
867declarations when given the --declarations option.
868
869*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 870"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
871
872*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
873types.
874
875*** In Fortran, procedure is no more tagged.
876
877*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
878
879*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
880are now tagged.
881
882*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
883variables are tagged.
884
885*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
886
8dc78b52
FP
887*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
888for PSWrap.
79214ddf 889
f6737cde
GM
890** Changes in etags.el
891
3f6e4b8b
GM
892*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
893tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
894is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
895
f6737cde
GM
896*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
897the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
898
899If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
900FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
901TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
902obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
903
904TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
905
906FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
907List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
908
909A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
910
911 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
912 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
913 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
914
915*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
916of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
917
918*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
919names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
920
fbc164de
PE
921** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
922and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
923LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
924
59c1bf85
DL
925** New language environments `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
926These correspond respectively to the ISO character sets 8859-14
927(Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). There is
928currently no specific input method support for them.
929
e33b0397
DL
930** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sqeuence-nos' to
931remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
932appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
933
934** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
935
6f8ea2ae
DL
936** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
937
c0510d27
GM
938** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
939containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
940expression from that list, are not checked.
941
a933dad1
DL
942** New modes and packages
943
5e5dff44
GM
944*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
945authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
946
947The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
948the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
949the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
950Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
951even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
952single step.
953
954On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
955matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
956probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
957contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
958
f7136ee8
GM
959*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
960unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
961actually modifying content of a buffer.
962
bbd9b566
GM
963*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
964PostScript.
965
966Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
967
968The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
969
970 ; comment (until end of line)
971 A non-terminal
972 "C" terminal
973 ?C? special
974 $A default non-terminal
975 $"C" default terminal
976 $?C? default special
977 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
978 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
979 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
980 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
981 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
982 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
983 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
984 C+ one or more occurrences of C
985 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
986 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
987 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
988 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
989 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
990 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
991 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
992
993Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
994
99453a38
GM
995*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
996align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
997determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
998example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
999equal signs of assignments.
1000
559cee90
DL
1001*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1002paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1003
6448a6b3
GM
1004*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1005list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1006buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1007customize the package.
1008
249652b1
GM
1009*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1010replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1011is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1012and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1013not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1014which answers different needs.
1015
3476b54a
GM
1016*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1017suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1018expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1019course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1020reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1021to be enabled.
1022
8964fec7
SM
1023*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1024containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1025
a933dad1
DL
1026*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1027
1028*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1029
1030*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1031
1032*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1033Pascal) language.
1034
1035*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1036the text at point.
1037
1038*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1039
8d54eb69
DL
1040*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1041
a933dad1
DL
1042*** whitespace.el ???
1043
ebcfda83
GM
1044*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1045files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1046(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1047interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1048often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1049uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1050codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1051
1052*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1053
1054Here is an example of columns:
1055
1056horse apple bus
1057dog pineapple car EXTRA
1058porcupine strawberry airplane
1059
1060Doing the following settings:
1061
1062 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1063 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1064 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1065 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1066
1067
1068Selecting the lines above and typing:
1069
1070 M-x delimit-columns-region
1071
1072It results:
1073
1074[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1075[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1076[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1077
1078delim-col has the following options:
1079
1080 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1081 before all columns.
1082
1083 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1084 between each column.
1085
1086 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1087 after all columns.
1088
1089 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1090 each column.
1091
1092delim-col has the following commands:
1093
1094 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1095 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1096
f507826c
GM
1097*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
1098were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu
1099is displayed in the "Files" menu.
1100
1101The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions.
1102
1103To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode.
1104
1105To enable recentf at Emacs startup use
1106M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET.
1107
1108To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use
1109M-x customize-group RET recentf RET.
1110
8062f458
DL
1111*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1112text.
1113
36e24b82 1114*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1115of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1116specific to Message mode.
1117
36e24b82
DL
1118*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1119viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1120with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1121
aaa659ef
DL
1122*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1123interface to access directory servers using different directory
1124protocols. It has a separate manual.
1125
eee54b0e
DL
1126*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1127for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1128
612839b6
GM
1129*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1130
1131*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
1132minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1133
a933dad1
DL
1134** Withdrawn packages
1135
1136*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1137functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1138
3261c1d8
DL
1139*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1140
1141*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
a933dad1
DL
1142\f
1143* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1144
1145Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1146--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1147When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1148so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1149
7464346d
GM
1150** The function `add-minor-mode' simplifies the definition of minor
1151modes.
1152
1153- Function: add-minor-mode SYMBOL NAME MAP
1154
1155Register a new minor mode. SYMBOL is the name of a buffer-local
1156variable that is toggled on or off to say whether the minor mode is
1157active or not. NAME is the string that will appear in the mode line
1158when the minor mode is active. MAP is the keymap for the minor mode.
1159
612839b6
GM
1160** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1161`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1162from which the command was issued.
1163
1164** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1165`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1166`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1167additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1168operate on.
1169
271b4185
GM
1170** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1171to `window-buffer-height'.
1172
1173- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1174
1175Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1176The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1177lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1178
1179Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1180respectively.
1181
1182If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1183COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1184
1185The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1186obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1187on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1188
1189Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1190buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1191possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1192is currently displayed in some window.
1193
3c30cb6e
DL
1194** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1195argument function's results.
1196
62f20204
GM
1197** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1198signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1199
c0510d27
GM
1200** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1201header is the list of headers passed to it.
1202
1203** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1204ignores differences in case and text representation.
1205
1206** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1207cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1208as follows:
1209
1210 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1211 nil don't display a cursor
1212 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1213 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1214 others display a box cursor.
1215
9a0dd3dc
GM
1216** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1217an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1218defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1219set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1220
d7b511c4
GM
1221** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
1222specificationa in string form as accepted my `modify-syntax-entry' to
1223the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1224text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1225
1226Example:
1227
1228 (string-to-syntax "()")
1229 => (4 . 41)
1230
1fa28578
GM
1231** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1232other than 10.
1233
1234*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1235INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1236
1237 #b1111
1238 => 15
1239 #b-1111
1240 => -15
1241
1242*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1243
1244 #o666
1245 => 438
1246
1247*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1248
1249 #xbeef
1250 => 48815
1251
1252*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1253
1254 #2R-111
1255 => -7
1256 #25rah
1257 => 267
1258
3d4ff2dd 1259** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
e9b4e5ff
GM
1260the given property to obtain a a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
1261and isn't a string.
1262
3d4ff2dd
GM
1263** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1264a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1265value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1266not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1267
16ce590d
DL
1268+++
1269** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1270
73825616 1271** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1272for a regexp in a string.
1273
1274** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1275`mouse-position-function'.
1276
723e779c
GM
1277** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1278that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1279
d1e103b2
GM
1280** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1281Keywords are now always considered constants.
1282
31047e0d
DL
1283+++
1284** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1285returns it.
1286
7a85e4df
GM
1287** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1288returned by function `recent-keys'.
1289
02b14400
RS
1290+++
1291** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1292can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1293Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1294etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1295mode.
404fa7d6 1296
02b14400 1297+++
8964fec7
SM
1298** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1299and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1300
02b14400
RS
1301+++
1302** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1303has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1304function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1305returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1306been performed."
1307
1308When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1309and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1310hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1311then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1312
02b14400 1313+++
81da8b32
GM
1314** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1315In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1316and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1317
02b14400 1318+++
9e207b90
GM
1319** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1320with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1321specified table.
1322
1323 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1324
1325Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1326TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1327saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1328what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1329
02b14400 1330+++
d7f89643 1331** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1332Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1333
02b14400 1334+++
dde9e75a
GM
1335** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1336removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1337
02b14400 1338+++
9da30515
GM
1339** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1340instead of being optional.
1341
02b14400 1342+++
d20679eb
GM
1343** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1344modify read-only text.
1345
02b14400 1346+++
fbc164de
PE
1347** New functions and variables for locales.
1348
1349The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1350decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1351time functions like strftime. The new variables
1352`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1353locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1354
1355The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1356environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1357the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1358environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1359not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1360`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1361`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1362
02b14400 1363+++
863476d1
SM
1364** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1365To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1366modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1367start sequences.
1368
02b14400 1369+++
ef6d912c
GM
1370** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1371because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1372
02b14400 1373+++
a933dad1
DL
1374** New function `propertize'
1375
1376The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1377strings with text properties.
1378
1379- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1380
1381Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1382by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1383PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1384specified value of that property. Example:
1385
1386 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1387
1388+++
1389** push and pop macros.
1390
02b14400
RS
1391Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1392are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1393as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1394
1395(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1396(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1397 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1398
02b14400
RS
1399** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1400
6c7fd5aa
RS
1401Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1402are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1403
1404(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1405 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1406 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1407 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1408
1409(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1410 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1411 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1412 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1413
a933dad1
DL
1414+++
1415** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1416as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1417
1418[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1419[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1420[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1421[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1422[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1423 space, and DEL.
1424[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1425 and DEL.
1426[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1427 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1428 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1429[:alpha:] matches letters.
1430 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1431 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1432[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1433[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1434[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1435[:punct:] matches punctuation.
1436 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1437 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
1438[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
1439[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
1440[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
1441
1442+++
1443** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
1444
1445The following functions are defined for hash tables:
1446
1447- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
1448
1449The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
1450are optional. The following arguments are defined:
1451
1452:test TEST
1453
1454TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
1455Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
1456it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
1457
1458:size SIZE
1459
1460SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
1461many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
1462
1463:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
1464
1465REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
1466full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
1467size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
14681.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
1469old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
1470
1471:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
1472
1473THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
1474hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
1475(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
1476
1477:weakness WEAK
1478
1479WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
1480Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
1481their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
1482hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
1483
1484- Function: makehash &optional TEST
1485
1486Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
1487
1488- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
1489
1490Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
1491
1492- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
1493
1494Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
1495values are shared.
1496
1497- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
1498
1499Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
1500
1501- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1502
1503Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
1504
1505- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
1506
1507Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
1508
1509- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1510
1511Returns the size of TABLE.
1512
1513- Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
1514
1515Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
1516
1517- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
1518
1519Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
1520
1521- Function: clrhash TABLE
1522
1523Clear TABLE.
1524
1525- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
1526
1527Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
1528not found.
1529
79214ddf 1530- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
1531
1532Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
1533another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
1534
1535- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
1536
1537Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
1538
1539- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
1540
1541Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
1542arguments KEY and VALUE.
1543
1544- Function: sxhash OBJ
1545
1546Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
1547
1548- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
1549
1550Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
1551a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 1552comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
1553and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
1554of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
1555
1556TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
1557
1558HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
1559code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
1560integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
1561
1562Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
1563be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
1564
1565 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
1566 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
1567
1568 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
1569 (sxhash (upcase a)))
1570
79214ddf 1571 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
1572 'case-fold-string-hash))
1573
1574 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
1575
1576+++
1577** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
1578
1579It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
1580circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
1581a cons cell which is its own cdr.
1582
1583+++
1584** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
1585
1586If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
1587#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
1588
a933dad1
DL
1589+++
1590** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
1591t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
1592specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
1593is too short to reach that column.
1594
1595+++
1596** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
1597now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
1598after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
1599two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
1600
1601If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
1602perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
1603and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
1604
1605+++
1606** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
1607to specify which buffer to return the size of.
1608
1609+++
1610** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
1611calendar-move-hook after moving point.
1612
1613+++
1614** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
1615directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
1616small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
1617small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
1618temporary-file-directory instead.
1619
1620+++
1621** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
1622the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
1623`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
1624hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
1625
1626+++
1627** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
1628elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
1629
1630+++
1631** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
1632
1633make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
1634creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
1635ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
1636
1637+++
1638** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
1639
1640The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
1641on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
1642is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
1643never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
1644ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
1645overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
1646
1647If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
1648that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
1649to get an error if the file exists at that time.
1650The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
1651
1652+++
1653** Function `format' now handles text properties.
1654
1655Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
1656If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
1657ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
1658result string.
1659
1660Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
1661string where arguments appear in the result string.
1662
1663Example:
1664
1665 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
1666 (s2 "world"))
1667 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
1668 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 1669 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
1670
1671results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
1672
1673+++
1674** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
1675
1676Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
1677The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
1678argument in it.
1679
1680 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
1681 (arg "world"))
1682 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
1683 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
1684 (message msg arg))
1685
1686+++
1687** Sound support
1688
1689Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
1690(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
1691
1692Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
1693(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
1694to enable sound support.
1695
1696Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
1697list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
1698when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
1699functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
1700sound to play, before playing the sound.
1701
1702The following sound properties are supported:
1703
1704- `:file FILE'
1705
1706FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
1707searched relative to `data-directory'.
1708
6fb40beb
GM
1709- `:data DATA'
1710
1711DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
1712may be present, but not both.
1713
a933dad1
DL
1714- `:volume VOLUME'
1715
1716VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
17170..1. This property is optional.
1718
1719Other properties are ignored.
1720
1721** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
1722
1723** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
1724a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
1725
1726** Changes to garbage collection
1727
1728*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
1729of live and free strings.
1730
1731*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
1732strings that have been consed so far.
1733
a933dad1
DL
1734\f
1735* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
1736
1737Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1738--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1739When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1740so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1741
f6d3257b
GM
1742** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
1743to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
1744
1745Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
1746text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
1747is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
1748your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
1749laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
1750just display it black instead.
1751
1752This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
1753a line like
1754
1755 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
1756
1757in your `.emacs'.
1758
a933dad1
DL
1759** New face implementation.
1760
1761Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
1762font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
1763
1764+++
1765*** New faces.
1766
1767Each face can specify the following display attributes:
1768
1769 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 1770
a933dad1
DL
1771 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
1772 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 1773
a933dad1 1774 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 1775
a933dad1 1776 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 1777
a933dad1 1778 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 1779
a933dad1 1780 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 1781
a933dad1
DL
1782 7. Background color.
1783
1784 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
1785
1786 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
1787
1788 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
1789
1790 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
1791
1792 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
1793 color.
1794
1795 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
1796 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
1797
1798Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
1799same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
1800frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
1801faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
1802with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
1803attributes mentioned above.
1804
1805There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
1806definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
1807created frames.
79214ddf 1808
a933dad1
DL
1809A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
1810have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
1811`fully-specified'.
1812
1813+++
1814*** Face merging.
1815
1816The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
1817combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
1818aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
1819properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
1820that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
1821results in a fully-specified face.
1822
1823+++
1824*** Face realization.
1825
1826After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
1827merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
1828realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
1829available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
1830face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
1831cache of the frame on which it was realized.
1832
1833Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
1834character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
1835for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
1836charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
1837
1838Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
1839specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
1840being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
1841the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
1842statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
1843
1844In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
1845`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
18460x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
1847the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
1848initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
1849Emacs.
1850
1851Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
1852`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
1853registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
1854with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
1855
1856++++
1857**** Clearing face caches.
1858
1859The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
1860on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
1861unused fonts.
1862
1863+++
1864*** Font selection.
79214ddf 1865
a933dad1
DL
1866Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
1867given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
1868for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
1869
1870If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
1871pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
1872family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
1873property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
1874an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
1875
1876Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
1877against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
1878match for the given face attributes in this font list.
1879
1880Font selection can be influenced by the user.
1881
1882The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
1883attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
1884face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
1885names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
1886that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
1887width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
1888to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
1889
1890Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
1891specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
1892face doesn't exist.
1893
1894+++
1895**** Scalable fonts
1896
1897Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
1898since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
1899servers.
1900
1901To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 1902`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
1903scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
1904Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
1905scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
1906that list. Example:
1907
1908 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
1909
1910allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
1911
1912+++
1913*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
1914
1915- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
1916
1917Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
1918is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
1919string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
1920
1921If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
1922the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
1923FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
1924POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
1925SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
1926These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
1927if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
1928REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
1929the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
1930of the face font sort order.
1931
79214ddf 1932- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
1933
1934Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
1935omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
1936(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
1937non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
1938
1939- Variable: font-list-limit
1940
1941Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
1942won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
1943matching font. The default is currently 100.
1944
1945+++
1946*** Setting face attributes.
1947
1948For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
1949with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
1950implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
1951`face-attribute'.
1952
1953Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
1954symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
1955
1956The following attributes are recognized:
1957
1958`:family'
1959
1960VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
1961or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
1962and `?' are allowed.
1963
1964`:width'
1965
1966VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
1967It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
1968`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
1969`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
1970
1971`:height'
1972
1973VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
19741/10 pt.
1975
1976`:weight'
1977
1978VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
1979symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
1980`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
1981
1982`:slant'
1983
1984VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
1985symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
1986`reverse-oblique'.
1987
1988`:foreground', `:background'
1989
1990VALUE must be a color name, a string.
1991
1992`:underline'
1993
1994VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
1995VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
1996a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
1997don't underline.
1998
1999`:overline'
2000
2001VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2002VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2003string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2004overline.
2005
2006`:strike-through'
2007
2008VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2009striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2010face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2011is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2012
2013`:box'
2014
2015VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2016around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2017VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2018of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2019and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2020VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2021:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2022the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2023specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2024defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2025the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2026color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2027should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2028like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2029that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2030the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2031box.
2032
2033`:inverse-video'
2034
2035VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2036inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2037
2038`:stipple'
2039
2040If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2041The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2042searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2043HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2044is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2045explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2046
2047For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2048and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2049
2050`:font'
2051
2052Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2053XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2054is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2055versions of Emacs.
2056
2057For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2058be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2059must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2060
2061Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2062`defface'.
2063
2064*** Face attributes and X resources
2065
2066The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2067from X resources:
2068
2069 Face attribute X resource class
2070-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2071 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2072 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2073 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2074 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2075 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2076 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2077 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2078 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2079 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2080 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2081 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2082 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2083 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2084 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2085 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2086 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2087 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2088 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2089 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2090
2091+++
2092*** Text property `face'.
2093
2094The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2095specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2096specification can be
2097
20981. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2099
21002. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2101 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2102 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2103 for face attribute names.
2104
21053. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2106 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2107 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2108
2109+++
2110** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2111
acf3ecb7
EZ
2112The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2113on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2114the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2115default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2116`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2117used to clear the mapping table.
2118
acf3ecb7
EZ
2119** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2120
2121The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2122and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2123type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2124color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2125display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2126old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2127`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2128compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2129should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2130modify their color-related behavior.
2131
2132The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2133any frame type.
2134
8a5719f0
EZ
2135** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2136
2137The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2138`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2139`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2140`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2141`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2142`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2143display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2144the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2145platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2146
a933dad1
DL
2147+++
2148** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2149
463cac2d 2150This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2151
2152The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2153end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2154Otherwise, it returns zero.
2155
463cac2d
GM
2156** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2157
2158There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2159buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
2160text-property.
2161
9a9dfda8 2162Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2163forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2164to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2165not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2166commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2167boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2168`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2169functions.
463cac2d
GM
2170
2171Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2172a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2173editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2174
9a9dfda8
GM
2175The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2176
2177- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE
2178
2179Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
2180A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2181If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2182constrained position if that is is different.
2183
2184If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2185positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2186ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
2187constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property
2188as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2189is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
2190fields.
2191
2192If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2193NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2194unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2195C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2196only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2197
2198- Function: erase-field &optional POS
2199
2200Erases the field surrounding POS.
2201A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2202If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2203
2204- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2205
2206Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2207A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2208If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2209If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an
2210field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2211
2212- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2213
2214Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2215A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2216If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2217If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field,
2218then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2219
2220- Function: field-string &optional POS
2221
2222Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2223A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2224If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2225
2226- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2227
2228Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2229A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2230If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2231
a933dad1
DL
2232+++
2233** Image support.
2234
2235Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2236strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2237(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2238replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2239
2240If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2241`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2242AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2243window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2244area.
2245
2246IMAGE is an image specification.
2247
2248*** Image specifications
2249
2250Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2251is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2252specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2253symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2254described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2255
2256The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2257
2258`:ascent ASCENT'
2259
2260ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, and specifies the percentage
2261of the image's height to use for its ascent. Default is 50.
2262
2263`:margin MARGIN'
2264
79214ddf 2265MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2266margin around the image. Default is 0.
2267
2268`:relief RELIEF'
2269
2270RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2271around an image.
2272
2273`:algorithm ALGO'
2274
2275Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2276be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2277supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2278which is intended to display images "disabled."
2279
2280`:heuristic-mask BG'
2281
2282If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2283background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2284determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2285corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2286the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2287be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2288background of the image.
2289
2290`:file FILE'
2291
2292Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2293search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2294building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2295may be present in the image specification.
2296
518df5c4
GM
2297`:data DATA'
2298
2299Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2300supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2301present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2302support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2303
a933dad1
DL
2304*** Supported image types
2305
b246b1f6 2306**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2307
2308XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2309properties supported are
2310
2311`:foreground FG'
2312
2313FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2314is the frame's foreground.
2315
2316`:background FG'
2317
2318BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2319the frame's background color.
2320
2321XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2322case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2323instead of a `:file' property.
2324
2325`:width WIDTH'
2326
2327WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2328
2329`:height HEIGHT'
2330
2331HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2332
2333`:data DATA'
2334
2335DATA must be either
2336
2337 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2338 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2339
2340 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2341
2342 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2343 bitmap.
2344
2345**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2346
2347XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2348`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2349found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2350`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2351
2352Additional image properties supported are:
2353
2354`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2355
2356SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2357name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2358name.
2359
2360XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2361add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2362
a933dad1
DL
2363The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2364to display compressed images.
2365
2366**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2367
2368PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2369mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2370defined.
2371
2372**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2373
2374Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2375package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2376are:
2377
a933dad1
DL
2378**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2379
2380Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2381package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2382properties defined.
2383
2384**** GIF, image type `gif'
2385
2386Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
2387`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
2388
2389Additional image properties supported are:
2390
2391`:index INDEX'
2392
2393INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
2394multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
2395
2396This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
2397For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
2398at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
2399every 0.1 seconds.
2400
2401(defun show-anim (file max)
2402 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
2403 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
2404
2405(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
2406 (when (= idx max)
2407 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 2408 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
2409 (save-excursion
2410 (set-buffer buffer)
2411 (goto-char (point-min))
2412 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
2413 (insert-image img "x"))
2414 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
2415
2416**** PNG, image type `png'
2417
2418Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
2419package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2420properties defined.
2421
2422**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
2423
2424Additional image properties supported are:
2425
2426`:pt-width WIDTH'
2427
2428WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 2429integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
2430
2431`:pt-height HEIGHT'
2432
2433HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 2434must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
2435
2436`:bounding-box BOX'
2437
2438BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
2439the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
2440files. This is an required property.
2441
2442Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
2443lisp/gs.el.
2444
2445*** Lisp interface.
2446
79214ddf
FP
2447The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
2448which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
2449
2450Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
2451they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
2452The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
2453manually.
2454
2455*** Simplified image API, image.el
2456
2457The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
2458creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
2459can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
2460define an image based on available image types. The functions
2461`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
2462buffer.
2463
2464+++
2465** Display margins.
2466
2467Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
2468and images.
2469
2470To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
2471`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
2472`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
2473obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
2474`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
2475the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
2476of the display margins.
2477
2478You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
2479containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
2480one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
2481string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
2482in this file).
2483
2484+++
2485** Help display
2486
2487Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
2488moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
2489`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
2490that have a `help-echo' property.
2491
2492The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar
2493items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display.
2494If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is
2495evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the
2496tool-bar item is used.
2497
2498The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
2499help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the
2500help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
2501
2502+++
2503** Vertical fractional scrolling.
2504
2505The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
2506This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
2507
2508The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
2509scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
2510The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
2511scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
2512used.
2513
79214ddf
FP
2514 (global-set-key [A-down]
2515 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 2516 (interactive)
79214ddf 2517 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 2518 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 2519 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
2520 #'(lambda ()
2521 (interactive)
79214ddf 2522 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
2523 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
2524
2525+++
2526** New hook `fontification-functions'.
2527
2528Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
2529when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
2530variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
2531is called with one argument, POS.
2532
2533At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
2534characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
2535as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
2536property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
2537`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
2538
2539+++
2540** Tool bar support.
2541
2542Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
2543parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
2544controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
2545suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
2546`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
2547automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
2548
2549*** Tool bar item definitions
2550
2551Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
2552`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
2553where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 2554
a933dad1
DL
2555CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
2556evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
2557the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
2558property (see below).
79214ddf 2559
a933dad1
DL
2560BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
2561binding are currently ignored.
2562
2563The following properties are recognized:
2564
2565`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 2566
a933dad1
DL
2567FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
2568or disabled.
79214ddf 2569
a933dad1 2570`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 2571
a933dad1 2572FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 2573
a933dad1
DL
2574`:filter FUNCTION'
2575
2576FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
2577FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
2578used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 2579
a933dad1
DL
2580`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
2581
2582TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
2583and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 2584
a933dad1
DL
2585`:image IMAGES'
2586
2587IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
2588image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
2589meaning of each of the four elements:
2590
2591 Index Use when item is
2592 ----------------------------------------
2593 0 enabled and selected
2594 1 enabled and deselected
2595 2 disabled and selected
2596 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 2597
a933dad1 2598`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 2599
a933dad1
DL
2600Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
2601is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
2602
2603*** Tool-bar-related variables.
2604
2605If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
2606resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
2607than 1/4 of the frame's size.
2608
79214ddf 2609If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
2610raised when the mouse moves over them.
2611
2612You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
2613`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
2614pixels. Default is 1.
2615
2616You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
2617`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
2618
2619*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
2620
2621You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 2622a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
2623
2624 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
2625 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
2626 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
2627
2628is the original tool bar item definition, then
2629
2630 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
2631
2632makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
2633item.
2634
2635** Mode line changes.
2636
2637+++
2638*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
2639
2640The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
2641that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
2642a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
2643
26441. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
2645a `local-map' text property.
2646
26472. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
2648that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
2649
26503. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
2651is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
2652`local-map' property.
2653
2654The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
2655properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
2656example.
2657
54522c9f
GM
2658*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
2659evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
2660
a933dad1
DL
2661+++
2662*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
2663variable mode-line-format to nil.
2664
2665+++
2666*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
2667
2668This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
2669`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
2670completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
2671`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
2672line.
2673
2674The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
2675`header-line'.
2676
2677The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
2678position in the header-line.
2679
2680+++
2681** Text property `display'
2682
2683The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
2684also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
2685`display' property should be a display specification, as described
2686below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
2687
2688*** Variable width and height spaces
2689
2690To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
2691specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
2692`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
2693area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
2694marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
2695displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
2696simpler form STRETCH as property value.
2697
2698The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
2699PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
2700properties described below.
2701
2702The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
2703characters having the `display' property.
2704
2705- :width WIDTH
2706
2707Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
2708character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
2709
2710- :relative-width FACTOR
2711
2712Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
2713first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
2714same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
2715width of that character by FACTOR.
2716
2717- :align-to HPOS
2718
2719Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
2720value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
2721
2722Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
2723
2724- :height HEIGHT
2725
2726Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
2727normal line height.
2728
2729- :relative-height FACTOR
2730
2731The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
2732of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
2733
2734- :ascent ASCENT
2735
2736Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
2737used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
2738baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
2739equal to 100.
2740
2741You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
2742
2743*** Images
2744
2745A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
2746. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
2747in the display, the characters having this display specification in
2748their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
2749the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
2750`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
2751area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
2752the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
2753as display specification.
2754
2755*** Other display properties
2756
2757- :space-width FACTOR
2758
2759Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
2760should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
2761integer or float.
2762
2763- :height HEIGHT
2764
2765Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
2766
2767If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
2768means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
2769the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
2770``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
2771a font is available counts as a step.
2772
2773If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
2774as tall as the frame's default font.
2775
2776If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
2777height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
2778
2779Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
2780`height' bound to the current specified font height.
2781
2782- :raise FACTOR
2783
2784FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
2785font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
2786raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
2787amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
2788`:height' subproperty.
2789
2790*** Conditional display properties
2791
2792All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
2793has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
2794applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
2795During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
2796the text having the `display' property.
2797
2798The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
2799`(:when t SPEC)'.
2800
2801+++
2802** New menu separator types.
2803
2804Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
2805item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
2806treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
2807to specify other menu separator types.
2808
2809- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
2810
2811No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
2812separator occurs.
2813
2814- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
2815
2816A single line in the menu's foreground color.
2817
2818- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
2819
2820A double line in the menu's foreground color.
2821
2822- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
2823
2824A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
2825
2826- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
2827
2828A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
2829
2830- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
2831
2832A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
2833displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
2834
2835- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
2836
2837A single line with 3D raised appearance.
2838
2839- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
2840
2841A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
2842
2843- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
2844
2845A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
2846
2847- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
2848
2849Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
2850
2851- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
2852
2853Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
2854
2855- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
2856
2857Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
2858
2859- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
2860
2861Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
2862
2863Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
2864the corresponding single-line separators.
2865
2866+++
2867** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
2868
2869The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
2870`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
2871Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
2872that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
2873default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
2874default background is the background color of the frame, and the
2875default foreground is black.
2876
2877The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
2878(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
2879`ScrollBarBackground').
2880
2881Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
2882settings for scroll bar colors.
2883
2884+++
2885** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
2886display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
2887
2888---
2889** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
2890starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
2891on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
2892line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
2893the original window start.
2894
2895---
2896** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
2897`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
2898now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
2899
2900+++
2901** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
2902
2903A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
2904`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
2905windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
2906other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
2907
2908The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
2909fixed-width and fixed-height.
2910
2911 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
2912
2913A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
2914fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
2915window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
2916change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
2917temporarily to nil, for example
2918
2919 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
2920 (enlarge-window 10))
2921
79214ddf 2922Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 2923or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
2924
2925** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
2926terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
2927to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
2928overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
2929horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
2930support a vertical-bar cursor).
e33b0397
DL
2931^L
2932* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
2933
2934** Not new, but not mentioned before:
2935M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
a933dad1
DL
2936\f
2937* Changes in Emacs 20.4
2938
2939** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
2940
2941You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
2942Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
2943`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
2944
2945If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
2946is the one that is used.
2947
2948** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
2949the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
2950Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
2951separate from the command's regular output.
2952Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
2953says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
2954In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
2955the buffer name.
2956
2957When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
2958output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
2959it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
2960cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
2961
2962** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
2963the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
2964is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
2965created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
2966
2967** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
2968example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
2969match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
2970quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
2971
2972** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
2973now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
2974if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
2975they never ignore case.
2976
2977** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
2978under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
2979applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
2980of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
2981just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
2982convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
2983part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
2984
2985If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
2986the same format that was used in the file before.
2987
2988You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
2989`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
2990
2991** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
2992renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
2993This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
2994
2995** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
2996The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
2997buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
2998your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
2999is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3000end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3001Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3002
3003The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3004eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3005control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3006format. You can now customize these variables.
3007
3008** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3009filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3010filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3011enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3012
3013** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3014in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3015windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3016
3017** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3018dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3019doesn't have any effect.
3020
3021** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3022not one per buffer.
3023
3024** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3025use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3026 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3027
3028** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3029To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3030`auto-show-mode' command.
3031
3032** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3033avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3034versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3035choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3036occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3037
3038** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3039cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3040
3041** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3042character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3043feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3044
3045** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3046the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3047interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3048and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3049
3050** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3051
3052The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3053that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3054one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3055codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3056set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3057
3058Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3059from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3060
3061IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3062equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3063a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3064`?' on other systems.
3065
3066IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3067feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3068Unix.
3069
3070Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3071current codepage when it starts.
3072
3073** Mail changes
3074
feab4fba
GM
3075*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3076`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3077appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3078non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3079MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3080headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3081latin-1:
3082
3083 MIME-version: 1.0
3084 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3085 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3086
a933dad1
DL
3087*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3088default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3089default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3090sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3091buffer-file-coding-system.
3092
3093You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3094sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3095mail.
3096
3097*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3098if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3099Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3100list of possible coding systems.
3101
3102** CC Mode changes
3103
3104*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3105modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3106longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3107docstring for details.
3108
3109*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3110symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3111found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3112prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3113lineup functions use this feature currently.
3114
3115*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3116"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3117
3118*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3119"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3120
3121*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3122from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3123symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3124c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3125anonymous classes.
3126
3127*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3128syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3129
3130*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3131inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3132support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3133function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3134
3135*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3136(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3137brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3138c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3139(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3140
3141*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3142
3143*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3144
3145*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3146for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3147
3148*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3149
3150*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3151associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3152This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3153circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3154class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3155
3156** Gnus changes.
3157
3158*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3159added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3160Gnus manual for the full story.
3161
3162*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3163before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3164group, which is created automatically.
3165
3166*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3167values.
3168
3169*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3170
3171*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3172outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3173
3174*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3175`C-u C-c C-c'.
3176
3177*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3178
3179*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3180re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3181
3182*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3183
3184*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3185Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3186
3187*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3188`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3189
3190*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3191control over simplification.
3192
3193*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3194
3195*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3196limit.
3197
3198*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3199
3200*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3201
79214ddf 3202*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
a933dad1
DL
3203If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3204rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3205
3206*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3207`a' forces normal posting method.
3208
3209*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3210-- `W d'.
3211
3212*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3213to a non-nil value.
3214
3215*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3216where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3217
3218*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3219has been added.
3220
3221*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3222
3223*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3224
3225*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3226`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3227
3228*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3229`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3230
3231*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3232
3233*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3234been added.
3235
3236*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3237`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3238
3239*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3240updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3241
3242*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3243
3244*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3245
3246*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3247
3248** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3249
3250*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3251options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3252nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3253
3254*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3255TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3256of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3257TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3258can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3259
3260*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3261All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3262but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3263the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3264
3265*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3266the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3267buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3268mismatch.
3269
3270** Changes to RefTeX mode
3271
3272*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3273file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3274
3275*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3276lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3277characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3278removed from the label.
3279
3280*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3281a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3282
3283*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3284customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3285
3286*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3287`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
79214ddf 3288expressions.
a933dad1
DL
3289
3290*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3291
3292** New/deleted modes and packages
3293
3294*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3295SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3296
3297*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3298editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3299SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3300
3301*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3302changes with a special face.
3303
3304*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3305this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3306Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3307\f
3308* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3309
3310** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3311This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3312conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3313and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3314check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3315
3316The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3317Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3318distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3319
3320** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3321MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3322controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3323directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3324Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3325on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3326string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3327program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3328printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3329
3330** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3331output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3332available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3333input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3334temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
3335program.
3336
3337An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
3338and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
3339programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
3340automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
3341as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
3342ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
3343
3344** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
3345a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
3346MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
3347was not documented clearly before.
3348
3349** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
3350This includes Tetris and Snake.
3351\f
3352* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
3353
3354** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
3355return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
3356They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
3357meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
3358
3359** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
3360WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
3361and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
3362
3363** Changes in the file-attributes function.
3364
3365*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
3366It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
3367
3368*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
3369the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
3370integers.
3371
3372** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
3373files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
3374arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
3375file names and attributes are returned.
3376
3377** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
3378sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
3379accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
3380It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
3381returns the result.
3382
3383** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
3384to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
3385
3386** New functions for base64 conversion:
3387
3388The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
3389into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
3390performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
3391optionally.
3392
3393Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
3394job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
3395
3396**
3397The new function process-running-child-p
3398will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
3399terminal to its own child process.
3400
3401** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
3402when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
3403to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
3404itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
3405
3406** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
3407be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
3408
3409** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
3410:included is an alias for :visible.
3411
3412easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
3413easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
3414to move or copy menu entries.
3415
3416** Multibyte editing changes
3417
3418*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
3419an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
3420make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
3421work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
3422char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
3423 (setq char (sref str idx)
3424 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
3425The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
3426
3427If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
3428(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
3429 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
3430
3431*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
3432region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
3433deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
3434
3435 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
3436
3437This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
3438across the boundary.
3439
3440*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
3441`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
3442 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
3443 contains 8-bit characters.
3444 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
3445 contains invalid characters.
3446
3447*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
3448text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
3449preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
3450text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
3451way.
3452
3453*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
3454If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
3455end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
3456prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
3457
3458*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
3459compose Thai characters in a string.
3460
3461** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
3462argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
3463for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
3464menus should always use the third argument.
3465
3466** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
3467read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
3468arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
3469input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
3470
3471** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
3472of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
3473programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
3474inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
3475
3476** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
3477the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
3478returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
3479echo area contents.
3480
3481 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
3482
3483** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
3484NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
3485requested feature cannot be loaded.
3486
3487** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
3488foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
79214ddf 3489means to clear out that attribute.
a933dad1
DL
3490
3491** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
3492gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
3493
3494** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
3495read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
3496unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
3497end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
3498
3499** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
3500the gap of the current buffer.
3501
3502** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
3503to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
3504current buffer.
3505
3506** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
3507facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
3508These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
3509it back in after any modifications have been made.
3510\f
3511* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
3512
3513** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
3514the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
3515/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
3516directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
3517subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
3518
3519Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
3520names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
3521Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
3522which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
3523these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
3524
3525Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
3526starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
3527time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
3528
3529This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
3530Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
3531to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
3532subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
3533`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
3534results.
3535
3536** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
3537GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
3538that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
3539fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
3540\f
3541* Changes in Emacs 20.3
3542
3543** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
3544including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
3545it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
3546perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
3547
3548** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
3549specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
3550region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
3551further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
3552command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
3553within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
3554are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
3555region.
3556
3557In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
3558selective undo.
3559
3560** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
3561unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
3562buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
3563effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
3564Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
3565
3566The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
3567though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
3568-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
3569load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
3570
3571** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
3572no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
3573enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
3574something that most users not do.
3575
3576** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
3577operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
3578The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
3579applications.
3580
3581C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
3582pasting operations.
3583
3584** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
3585setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
3586like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
3587printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
3588`ps-printer-name'.
3589
3590** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
3591minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
3592any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
3593except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
3594incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
3595hits a new word.
3596
3597Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
3598Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
3599to be confused by TeX commands.
3600
3601You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
3602correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
3603clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
3604of various alternative replacements and actions.
3605
3606Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
3607the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
3608corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
3609alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
3610flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
3611
3612Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
3613flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
3614
3615** Changes in input method usage.
3616
3617Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
3618the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
3619respectively.
3620
3621You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
3622
3623If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
3624of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
3625
3626The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
3627that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
3628
3629 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
3630
3631 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
3632
3633 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
3634 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
3635
3636 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
79214ddf 3637 given in the following case:
a933dad1
DL
3638 o When you are using a complex input method.
3639 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
3640
3641If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
3642input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
3643and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
3644setting it to t is helpful.
3645
3646The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
3647
3648In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
3649keys:
3650 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
3651 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
3652 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
3653These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
3654environment.
3655
3656** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
3657names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
3658minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
3659get
3660
3661 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
3662
3663which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
3664
3665Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
3666Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
3667
3668** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
3669at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
3670its owner and group.
3671
3672** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
3673Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
3674
3675** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
3676contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
3677
3678** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
3679which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
3680in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
3681by the left edge of the rectangle.
3682
3683** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
3684increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
3685C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
3686for writing keyboard macros.
3687
3688** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
3689files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
3690frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
3691the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
3692additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
3693info.
3694
3695** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
3696
3697** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
3698query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
3699contents only.
3700
3701** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
3702confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
3703the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
3704says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
3705
3706** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
3707non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
3708literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
3709
3710** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
3711now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
3712Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
3713inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
3714
3715** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
3716failure if the command produces no output.
3717
3718** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
3719manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
3720the mouse.
3721
3722** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
3723mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
3724function and variable names.
3725
3726** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
3727reading specific files. This has higher priority than
3728file-coding-system-alist.
3729
3730** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
3731t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
3732converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
3733the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
3734according to the current fontset.
3735
3736** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
3737
3738The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
3739that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
3740nonascii-insert-offset.
3741
3742For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
3743enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
3744nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
3745characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
3746
3747** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
3748an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
3749
3750** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
3751letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
3752
3753** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
3754are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
3755command keys.
3756
3757** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
3758user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
3759
3760Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
3761user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
3762all variables that have documentation.
3763
3764** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
3765shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
3766that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
3767minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
3768it should show; the default is 20.
3769
3770Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
3771the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
3772of your input.
3773
3774** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
3775all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
3776recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
3777argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
3778the customizable options which were changed since that version.
3779Newly added options are included as well.
3780
3781If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
3782then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
3783for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
3784
3785This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
3786Customize menu.
3787
3788** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
3789the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
3790
3791** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
3792buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
3793invoked.
3794
3795** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
3796that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
3797The default is 1.
3798
3799** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
3800syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
3801new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
3802(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
3803sensibly.
3804
3805** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
3806
3807** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
3808value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
3809two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
3810
3811** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
3812reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
3813for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
3814every night.
3815
7464346d
GM
3816** Desktop changes
3817
3818*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
a933dad1
DL
3819the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
3820
7464346d
GM
3821*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
3822and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
3823
a933dad1
DL
3824** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
3825read and post multi-lingual articles.
3826
3827** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
3828doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
3829be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
3830outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
3831the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
79214ddf 3832made invisible again.
a933dad1
DL
3833
3834** Mail reading and sending changes
3835
3836*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
3837the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
3838changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
3839toggle.
3840
3841*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
3842now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
3843summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
3844the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
3845rmail-default-body-file.
3846
3847*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
3848longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
3849handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
3850
3851*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
3852it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
3853is evaluated to insert the signature.
3854
3855*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
3856outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
3857handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
3858putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
3859transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
3860especially interested in trying feedmail.
3861
3862feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
3863feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
3864provided by feedmail are:
3865
3866**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
3867stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
3868there is also a queue for draft messages
3869
3870**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
3871be prompted for confirmation
3872
3873**** does smart filling of address headers
3874
3875**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
3876the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
3877can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
3878
3879**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
3880the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
3881/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
3882function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
3883
3884** Dired changes
3885
3886*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
3887files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
3888
3889*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
3890run Dired on the directory name at point.
3891
3892*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
3893files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
3894for a specified regexp.
3895
3896** VC Changes
3897
3898*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
3899conveniently.
3900
3901*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
3902faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
3903Dired.
3904
3905VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
3906directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
3907listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
3908currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
3909
3910You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
3911then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
3912vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
3913control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
3914on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
3915
3916All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
3917is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
3918`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
3919the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
3920`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
3921
3922The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
3923toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
79214ddf 3924VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
a933dad1
DL
3925`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
3926
3927Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
3928ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
3929command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
3930
3931*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
3932file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
3933session to resolve them.
3934
3935Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
3936resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
3937contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
3938uses as well).
3939
3940*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
3941command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
3942you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
3943either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
3944branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
3945If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
3946using ediff.
3947
3948** Changes in Font Lock
3949
3950*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
3951are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
3952use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
3953unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
3954compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
3955
3956** Frame name display changes
3957
3958*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
3959frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
3960raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
3961when many frames are invisible or iconified.
3962
3963*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
3964frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
3965menu.
3966
3967** Comint (subshell) changes
3968
3969*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
3970subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
3971with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
3972
3973*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
3974
3975C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
3976that is, the line after the last line you got.
3977You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
3978
3979C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
3980send the current line together with the following line, when you send
3981the following line.
3982
3983C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
3984which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
3985previously sent input.
3986
3987C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
3988it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
3989as the search string.
3990
3991*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
3992automatically in compilation-mode windows.
3993
3994** C mode changes
3995
3996*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
3997and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
3998assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
79214ddf 3999definition.
a933dad1
DL
4000
4001*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4002(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4003Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4004style is still the default however.
4005
4006*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4007
4008*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4009are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4010them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4011
4012*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4013and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4014
4015*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4016namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4017
4018*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4019makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4020
4021*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4022c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4023
4024*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4025should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4026package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4027variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4028
4029** Changes to hippie-expand.
4030
79214ddf 4031*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
a933dad1
DL
4032non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4033which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4034
4035*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4036non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4037expanding dynamically.
4038
4039*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4040non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4041
4042*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4043non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4044this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4045expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4046
4047*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4048
4049** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4050
4051*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4052bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4053automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4054bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4055against the first word in the title.
4056
4057*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4058capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4059bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
79214ddf 4060lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
a933dad1 4061lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
79214ddf 4062bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
a933dad1
DL
4063
4064*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4065generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4066replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4067bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4068
4069** Changes in vcursor.el.
4070
4071*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4072and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4073variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4074entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4075`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4076in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4077
4078*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4079Editing group once the package is loaded.
4080
4081*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4082generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4083vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4084
4085*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4086vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4087
4088** Ispell changes.
4089
79214ddf
FP
4090*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4091buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
a933dad1
DL
4092are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4093
4094*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4095A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4096and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4097defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
79214ddf 4098include:
a933dad1
DL
4099
4100 o URLs are automatically skipped
4101 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4102
4103*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4104
4105** Changes to RefTeX mode
4106
4107RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4108large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4109re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4110section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4111
4112*** New recursive parser.
4113
4114The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4115entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4116recursive parser scans the individual files.
4117
4118*** Parsing only part of a document.
79214ddf 4119
a933dad1
DL
4120Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4121partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4122the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4123
4124 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4125
4126*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4127
4128This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4129
4130 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4131
4132*** Using multiple selection buffers
4133
4134If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4135for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4136
4137 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4138
4139*** References to external documents.
4140
4141The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4142documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4143documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4144macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4145RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4146the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4147The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4148
4149*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4150
4151The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4152and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4153
4154Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4155the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4156
4157*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4158
4159The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4160buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4161
4162*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4163
4164The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4165contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4166`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4167have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4168enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4169at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4170more.
4171
4172*** Support for the varioref package
4173
4174The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4175
4176*** New hooks
4177
4178Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4179and citations are created. These hooks are
4180`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4181`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4182
4183*** Citations outside LaTeX
4184
4185The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4186a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4187
4188*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4189
4190The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4191fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4192fontified, use
4193
4194 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4195
4196** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4197With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4198the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4199directories that contain the same file name.
4200
4201Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4202Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4203file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4204Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4205have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4206names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4207directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4208directory.
4209
4210** New modes and packages
4211
4212*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4213It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4214it, but some do not.
4215
4216*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4217code.
4218
4219*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4220current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4221around in a buffer.
4222
4223Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4224
4225*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4226uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4227be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4228established system of notation similar to Chess.
4229
4230*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4231documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4232guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4233
4234*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4235available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4236system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4237simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4238functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4239the like.
4240
4241*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4242identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4243
4244*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4245within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4246used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4247the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4248
4249*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4250
4251 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4252 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4253 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4254 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4255 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4256 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4257 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4258 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4259 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4260 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4261 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4262
4263 Platform-specific modes:
4264
4265 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4266 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4267 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4268 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4269 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4270 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4271 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4272 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4273 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4274\f
4275* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4276
4277** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4278use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4279That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4280Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4281
4282Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4283you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4284consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4285
4286** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4287and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4288specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4289searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4290
4291** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4292multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4293character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4294environment.
4295
4296** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4297take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4298string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4299current input method for reading this one event.
4300
4301** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4302now control whether to output certain characters as
4303backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4304non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4305characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4306in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4307\f
4308* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4309
4310** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4311of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4312
4313** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4314in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4315always increases point by 1.
4316
4317The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4318considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4319
4320See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4321
4322** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4323Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4324default value changed. For example,
4325
4326 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4327 :type 'integer
4328 :group 'foo
4329 :version "20.3")
4330
79214ddf 4331 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
a933dad1
DL
4332 :version "20.3")
4333
4334If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
4335default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
4336is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
4337`:version' in the top level group.
4338
4339This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
4340
4341** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
4342starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
4343
4344However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
4345symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
4346support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
4347to themselves.
4348
4349If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
4350this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
4351values whatever.
4352
4353** There is a new debugger command, R.
4354It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
4355in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
4356
4357** Frame-local variables.
4358
4359You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
4360the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
4361local bindings for that variable.
4362
4363These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
4364frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
4365modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
4366parameter name.
4367
4368Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
4369Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
4370active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
4371that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
4372
4373It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
4374clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
4375very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
4376through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
4377
4378** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
4379"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
4380evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
4381makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
4382See the documentation in sregex.el.
4383
4384** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
4385is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
4386parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
4387The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
4388
4389** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
4390If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
4391
4392** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
4393known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
4394define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
4395
4396** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
4397when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
4398it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
4399history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
4400
4401The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
4402return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
4403empty input.
4404
4405** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
4406for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
4407`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
4408Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
4409`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
4410
4411** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
4412echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
4413a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
4414default password to use if the user enters nothing.
4415
4416** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
4417specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
4418function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
4419place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
4420non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
4421
4422** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
4423If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
4424up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
4425end of the window, even if this requires computation.
4426
4427** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
4428which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
4429If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
4430
4431** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
4432holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
4433was directed to display this buffer.
4434
4435** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
4436with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
4437describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
4438other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
4439set-window-configuration.
4440
4441** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
4442window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
4443positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
4444windows and the choice of buffers to display.
4445
4446** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
4447override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
4448look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
4449
4450If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
4451non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
4452map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
4453
4454minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
4455and it is meant to be set by major modes.
4456
4457** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
4458except that it discards all text properties from the result.
4459
4460** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
4461USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
4462floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
4463
4464** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
4465to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
4466in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
4467it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
4468
4469** Menu changes
4470
4471*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
4472keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
4473better supported.
4474
4475The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
4476a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
4477you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
4478can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
4479then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
4480
4481*** A new format for menu items is supported.
4482
4483In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
4484 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
4485defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
4486starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
4487
4488The format is:
4489 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
4490 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
4491where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
4492string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
4493The supported properties include
4494
4495:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4496 item is enabled.
4497:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4498 item should appear in the menu.
79214ddf 4499:filter FILTER-FN
a933dad1
DL
4500 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
4501 which will be REAL-BINDING.
4502 It should return a binding to use instead.
4503:keys DESCRIPTION
4504 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
4505 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
4506 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
4507:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
4508 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
4509 keyboard binding.
4510:key-sequence nil
4511 This means that the command normally has no
4512 keyboard equivalent.
4513:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
4514:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
4515 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
4516 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
4517 value says whether this button is currently selected.
4518
4519Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
4520Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
4521
4522(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
4523
4524** New event types
4525
4526*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
4527mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
4528corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
4529which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
4530
4531 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
4532
4533where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4534same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
4535indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
4536negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
4537the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
4538forward, away from the user.
4539
4540As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4541
4542*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
4543files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
4544and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
4545filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
4546loaded into Emacs. The format is:
4547
4548 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
4549
4550where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4551same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
4552that were dragged and dropped.
4553
4554As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4555
4556** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
4557
4558*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
4559any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
4560to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
4561
4562*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
4563can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
4564that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
4565
4566*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
4567in Emacs 19 and before.
4568
4569The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
4570The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
4571
4572*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
4573buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
4574unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
4575representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
4576
4577This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
4578as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
4579viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
4580one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
4581will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
4582
4583This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
4584representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
4585(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
4586consistent with the new representation.
4587
4588*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
4589representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
4590about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
4591however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4592
4593The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
4594nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
4595using the table nonascii-translation-table.
4596
4597*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
4598representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
4599representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4600
4601The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
4602loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
4603is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
4604
4605*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4606which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
4607
4608*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4609which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
4610
4611*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
4612portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
4613so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
4614You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
4615
4616*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
4617it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
4618
4619*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
4620convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
4621buffer or string being searched.
4622
4623One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
4624[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
4625searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
4626searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
4627obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
4628you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
4629expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
4630
4631*** Structure of coding system changed.
4632
4633All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
4634by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
4635which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
4636as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
4637vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
4638your own alias name of a coding system by the function
4639define-coding-system-alias.
4640
4641The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
4642the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
4643access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
4644pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
4645character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
4646safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
4647'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
4648`iso-8859-1'.
4649
4650Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
4651The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
4652coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
4653(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
4654
4655Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
4656also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
4657are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
4658the other character sets and read it back correctly.
4659
4660*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
4661proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
4662This function requires a user interaction.
4663
4664*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
4665find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
4666select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
4667systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
4668a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
4669select-safe-coding-system.
4670
4671*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
4672decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
4673last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
4674was done.
4675
4676*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
4677used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
4678coding systems used by some specific language environment.
4679
4680*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
4681return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
4682characters are found, they now return a list of single element
4683`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
4684
4685*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
4686coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
4687coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
4688converted.
4689
4690*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
4691coding system for communicating with other X clients.
4692
4693*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
4694character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
4695character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
4696each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
4697either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
4698range of characters.
4699
4700*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
4701Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
4702
4703*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
4704in the current buffer at position POS.
4705
4706*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
4707input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
4708function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
4709character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
4710event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
4711binding input-method-function to nil.
4712
4713The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
4714method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
4715input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
4716the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
4717not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
4718
4719The input method function is not called when reading the second and
4720subsequent events of a key sequence.
4721
4722*** You can customize any language environment by using
4723set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
4724
4725The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
4726customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
4727instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
4728environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
4729exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
4730\f
4731* Changes in Emacs 20.1
4732
4733** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
4734options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
4735at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
4736tree structure.
4737
4738M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
4739user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
4740
4741With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
4742session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
4743in your .emacs file.)
4744
4745** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
4746You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
4747
4748** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
4749This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
4750
4751** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
4752immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
4753kills the region.
4754
4755The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
4756delete the character before point, as usual.
4757
4758** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
4759on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
4760by setting search-highlight to nil.)
4761
4762** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
4763insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
4764the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
4765onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
4766history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
4767past.)
4768
4769** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
4770This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
4771in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
4772TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
4773makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
4774
4775As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
4776and is an alias for it.
4777
4778If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
4779use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
4780
4781** Scrolling changes
4782
4783*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
4784position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
4785
4786In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
4787on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
4788where it started.
4789
4790*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
4791move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
4792screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
4793does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
4794
4795*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
4796top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
4797comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
4798recenters the window.
4799
4800** International character set support (MULE)
4801
4802Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
4803including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
4804Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
4805Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
4806features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
4807MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
4808
4809Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
4810coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
4811character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
4812variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
4813into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
4814
4815Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
4816generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
4817supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
4818language, to make it possible to type them.
4819
4820The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
4821character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
4822
4823The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
4824to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
4825
4826You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
4827
4828 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
4829
4830Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
4831characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
4832argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
4833already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
4834characters for their work until they want to change.
4835
4836*** Input methods
4837
4838An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
4839specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
4840has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
4841the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
4842support several input methods.
4843
4844The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
4845another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
4846work.
4847
4848A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
4849characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
4850composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
4851consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
4852sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
4853letter.
4854
4855The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
4856by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
4857First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
4858marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
4859mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
4860
4861None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
4862they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
4863phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
4864converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
4865
4866Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
4867word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
4868typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
4869the first guess is wrong.
4870
4871*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
4872turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
4873
4874If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
4875byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
4876they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
4877the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
4878
4879However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
4880use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
4881includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
4882translate automatically to and from either one.
4883
4884*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
4885
4886Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
4887file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
4888sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
4889what you want.
4890
4891If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
4892example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
4893system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
4894multibyte characters in that buffer.
4895
4896If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
4897character conversion as well.
4898
4899*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
4900
4901A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
4902Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
4903requires using many fonts.
4904
4905Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
4906collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
4907
4908A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
4909the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
4910have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
4911you would use a font.
4912
4913If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
4914specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
4915display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
4916
4917The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
4918(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
4919characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
4920or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
4921and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
4922
4923*** Defining fontsets.
4924
4925Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
4926chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
4927with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
4928
4929Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
4930of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
4931`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
4932standard fontset are created automatically.
4933
4934If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
4935argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
4936FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
4937with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
4938name is `fontset-startup'.
4939
4940Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
4941The resource value should have this form:
4942 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
4943FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
4944 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
4945 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
4946 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
4947The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
4948of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
4949CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
4950FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
4951
4952Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
4953last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
4954You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
4955
4956For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
4957font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
4958following resource,
4959 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
4960the font for ASCII is generated as below:
4961 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
4962Here is the substitution rule:
4963 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
4964 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
4965 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
4966 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
4967 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
4968
4969The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
4970fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
4971that function explicitly to create a fontset.
4972
4973With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
4974like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
4975name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
4976fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
4977fontsets.
4978
4979*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
4980defaults for a particular choice of language.
4981
4982Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
4983method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
4984visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
4985already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
4986language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
4987system for new files that you create.
4988
4989It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
4990set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
4991whole Emacs session.
4992
4993For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
4994chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
4995with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
4996
4997*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
4998specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
4999specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5000the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5001coding systems that Emacs supports.
5002
5003*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5004lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5005This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5006After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5007is used for *the immediately following command*.
5008
5009So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5010write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5011
5012If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5013then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5014
5015For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5016visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5017
5018*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5019construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5020to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5021specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5022of the file.
5023
5024*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5025the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5026code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5027translated into that character code.
5028
5029This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5030various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5031
5032By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5033
5034*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5035the coding system for keyboard input.
5036
5037Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5038with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5039some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5040
5041By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5042
5043Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5044input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5045translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5046to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5047designed to work with terminals.
5048
5049*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5050specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5051This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5052has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5053translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5054in the corresponding buffer.
5055
5056By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5057
5058*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5059to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5060It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5061
5062*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5063an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5064command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5065want to use.
5066
5067C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5068method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5069
5070*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5071layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5072remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5073which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5074
5075*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5076the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5077related information.
5078
5079*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5080HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5081scripts.
5082
5083*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5084information about the support for a particular language.
5085You specify the language as an argument.
5086
5087*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5088the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5089first dash.
5090
5091A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5092(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5093whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
50941 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5095
5096 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5097 B big5 (Chinese)
5098 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5099 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5100 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5101 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5102 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5103 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5104 K euc-korea (Korean)
5105 R koi8 (Russian)
5106 Q tibetan
5107 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5108 T lao
5109 T tis620 (Thai)
5110 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5111 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5112 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5113 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5114 z hz (Chinese)
5115
5116When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5117two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5118coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5119keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5120
5121*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5122conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5123
5124When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5125into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5126rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5127Rmail files themselves.
5128
5129*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5130conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5131
5132Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5133for sending mail:
5134
5135- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5136- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5137- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5138 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5139- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5140
5141*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5142to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5143Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5144translations.
5145
5146** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5147of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5148insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5149without any conversion.
5150
5151** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5152You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5153RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5154any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5155
5156** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5157functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5158
5159Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5160Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5161
5162Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5163mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5164
5165** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5166complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5167in the buffer before point.
5168
5169With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5170symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5171you are using.
5172
5173With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5174just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5175
5176** File locking works with NFS now.
5177
5178The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5179in the same directory as FILENAME.
5180
5181This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5182works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5183can become a bottleneck.
5184
5185The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5186does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5187create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5188file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5189rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5190so useful that the change is worth while.
5191
5192When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5193are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5194collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5195tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5196
5197** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5198it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5199show-paren-mode.
5200
5201** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5202selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5203delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5204
5205** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5206within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5207complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5208
5209** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5210it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5211set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5212
5213** Changes in View mode.
5214
5215*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5216Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5217
5218*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5219view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5220
5221*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5222previous state.
5223
5224*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5225scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5226
5227*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5228non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5229not just the selected window.
5230
5231*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5232read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5233turns View mode on or off.
5234
5235*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5236how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5237delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5238
5239** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5240now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5241
5242** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5243has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5244presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5245which version to compare with.
5246
5247** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
79214ddf 5248blocks if a match is inside the block.
a933dad1
DL
5249
5250The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5251is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5252isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5253shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5254
5255By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5256of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5257blocks, all of them or none.
5258
5259** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5260current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5261confirmation first.
5262
5263** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5264now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5265However, the mode will not be changed if
5266(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5267(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5268 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5269(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5270
5271This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5272
5273However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5274these commands do not change the major mode.
5275
5276** M-x occur changes.
5277
5278*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5279it performs a case-sensitive search.
5280
5281*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5282if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5283using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5284
5285** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5286in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5287window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5288that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5289buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5290
5291** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5292after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5293appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5294come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5295
5296** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5297selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5298buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5299
5300** Outline mode changes.
5301
5302*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5303
5304*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5305
5306** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5307you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5308Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5309was already active.
5310
5311The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5312unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5313get confused by it.
5314
5315If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5316set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5317
5318** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5319
5320*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5321conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5322character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5323including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5324
5325The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5326mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5327copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5328
5329*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5330are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5331values.
5332
5333`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5334case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
5335`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
5336case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
5337
5338** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
5339certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
5340can be. The default value is 30.
5341
5342** Changes in Mail mode.
5343
5344*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
5345Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
5346composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
5347`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
5348`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
5349behavior.
5350
5351C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
5352compose-mail-other-frame.
5353
5354*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
5355the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
5356replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
5357buffer that shows the original message.
5358
5359*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
5360with separator lines around the contents.
5361
5362*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
5363in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
5364definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
5365need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
5366
5367*** New features in the mail-complete command.
5368
5369**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
5370for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
5371controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
5372Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
5373
5374**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
5375to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
5376/etc/passwd.
5377
5378**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
5379to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
5380/etc/passwd.
5381
5382** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
5383special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
5384directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
5385reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
5386
5387Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
5388when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
5389be taken to be magic.
5390
5391** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
5392files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
5393available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
5394
5395M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
5396(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
5397
5398** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
5399suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
5400
5401In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
5402
5403new key dired.el binding old key
5404------- ---------------- -------
5405 * c dired-change-marks c
5406 * m dired-mark m
5407 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
5408 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
5409 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
5410 * u dired-unmark u
5411 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
5412 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
5413 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
5414 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
5415 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
5416 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
5417
5418** Rmail changes.
5419
5420*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
5421saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
5422chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
5423each time you run it.
5424
5425*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
5426whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
5427
5428*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
5429messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
5430means to move in the opposite direction.
5431
5432*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
5433you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
5434
5435*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
5436just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
5437It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
5438can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
5439for output.
5440
5441** Gnus changes.
5442
5443*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
5444
79214ddf
FP
5445*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
5446Gnus.
a933dad1 5447
79214ddf 5448*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
a933dad1
DL
5449`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
5450
5451*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
5452article mode line.
5453
5454*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
5455
5456*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
5457
5458(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
5459
5460*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
5461are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
5462`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
5463
5464*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
5465
5466*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
5467
5468*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
5469See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
5470
5471*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
5472Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
5473used to pick articles.
5474
5475*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
5476another have been added.
5477
5478 `M-x gnus-change-server'
5479
5480*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
5481generating lines in buffers.
5482
5483*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
5484`M-C-_'.
5485
5486*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
5487
5488*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
5489
5490 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
5491
5492*** Scores can be decayed.
79214ddf 5493
a933dad1
DL
5494 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
5495
5496*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
5497Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
5498
5499*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
5500the native server.
5501
5502 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
5503
5504*** A new command for reading collections of documents
5505(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
5506
5507*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
5508
5509*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
5510even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
5511
5512*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
5513(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
5514
5515 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
5516 a group.
5517
5518*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
5519sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
5520
5521 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
5522
5523*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
5524
5525 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
5526
5527*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
79214ddf 5528
a933dad1
DL
5529 Use the `Y c' command.
5530
5531*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
5532
5533*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
5534
5535 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
5536
5537*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
5538from incoming mail before saving the mail.
79214ddf 5539
a933dad1
DL
5540 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
5541
5542*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
5543
5544*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
5545the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
5546
5547 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
5548
5549Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
5550and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
5551from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
5552hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
5553this issue.)
5554
5555Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
5556automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
5557particular news group. This can be done by:
5558
5559 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
5560
5561Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
5562of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
5563"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
5564system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
5565for reading and posting).
5566
5567CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
5568 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
5569Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
5570newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
5571there.
5572
5573Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
5574default. Here are some of these default settings:
5575
5576 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
5577 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
5578 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
5579 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
5580 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
5581
5582When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
5583the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
5584
5585** CC mode changes.
5586
5587*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
5588code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
5589values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
5590this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
5591Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
5592loaded.
5593
5594If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
79214ddf 5595Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
a933dad1 5596style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
79214ddf
FP
5597share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
5598c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
a933dad1
DL
5599must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
5600
5601*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
5602of the current buffer.
5603
5604*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
5605it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
5606of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
5607
5608*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
5609style that the Python developers like.
5610
5611*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
5612This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
5613just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
5614
5615** VC Changes [new]
5616
5617** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
5618name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
5619directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
5620
5621This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
5622master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
5623developers.
5624
5625You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
5626RET in a buffer visiting that file.
5627
5628*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
5629other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
5630writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
5631calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
5632
5633*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
5634version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
5635
5636** Calendar changes.
5637
5638A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
5639of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
5640for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
5641
5642** ps-print changes
5643
79214ddf 5644There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
a933dad1
DL
5645
5646*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
5647
5648The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
5649formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
5650`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
5651`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
5652It defaults to `letter'.
5653If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
5654
5655The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
79214ddf 5656of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
a933dad1
DL
5657non-nil means "landscape" mode.
5658
5659The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
5660It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
79214ddf 5661It defaults to 1.
a933dad1
DL
5662
5663*** Horizontal layout
5664
5665The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
5666`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
5667All are measured in points.
5668
5669*** Vertical layout
5670
5671The vertical layout is determined by the variables
5672`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
5673All are measured in points.
5674
5675*** Headers
5676
5677If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
5678`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
5679margin above the text.
5680
79214ddf 5681If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
a933dad1
DL
5682framing box is printed around the header.
5683
5684The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
5685`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
5686
79214ddf
FP
5687The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
5688`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
a933dad1
DL
5689`ps-header-font-size'.
5690
5691*** Font managing
5692
5693The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
5694used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
5695`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
5696elements to this alist.
5697
79214ddf 5698The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
a933dad1
DL
5699for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
5700
5701** hideshow changes.
5702
5703*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
79214ddf 5704C++, ; for lisp).
a933dad1
DL
5705
5706*** Support for java-mode added.
5707
5708*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
5709in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
5710
5711*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
5712the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
5713way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
5714
5715*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
5716robust and a lot faster.
5717
79214ddf 5718*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
a933dad1
DL
5719
5720*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
5721to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
5722documentation for more details.
5723
5724** Changes in Enriched mode.
5725
5726*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
5727filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
5728of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
5729use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
5730the next time unless the fill-column is different.
5731
5732*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
5733distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
5734as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
5735as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
5736
5737** Font Lock mode
5738
5739*** Custom support
5740
5741The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
5742font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
5743faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
5744group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
5745your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
5746consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
5747
5748You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
5749
5750*** Maximum decoration
5751
5752Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
5753default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
5754of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
5755supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
5756to get the old behavior.
5757
5758*** New support
5759
5760Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
5761
5762Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
5763support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
5764
5765*** Configurable support
5766
5767Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
5768additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
5769c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
5770java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
5771list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
5772of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
5773convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
5774
5775Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
5776way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
5777it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
5778
5779*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
5780
5781You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
5782highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
5783for any mode.
5784
5785For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
5786
5787 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
5788
5789in your ~/.emacs.
5790
5791*** New faces
5792
5793Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
5794font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
5795distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
5796to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
5797
5798*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
5799
5800The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
5801cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
5802same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
5803
5804*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
5805
5806The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
5807according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
5808the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
5809non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
5810refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
5811the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
5812Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
5813
5814This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
5815For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
5816this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
5817refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
5818containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
5819the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
5820
5821As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
5822
5823Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
5824Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
5825Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
5826new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
5827
5828If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
5829settings.
5830
5831** Ada mode changes.
5832
5833*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
5834If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
5835procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
5836you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
5837stubs.
5838
5839*** There are two new commands:
5840 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
5841 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
5842
5843The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
5844`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
79214ddf 5845`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
a933dad1
DL
5846
5847*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
5848is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
5849Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
5850
5851*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
5852formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
5853places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
5854space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
5855
5856** Scheme mode changes.
5857
5858*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
5859mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
5860for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
5861with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
5862have any effect.
5863
5864If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
5865still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
5866scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
5867variables as buffer-local variables.
5868
5869*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
5870Use M-x dsssl-mode.
5871
133c9e59
GM
5872** Changes to the emacsclient program
5873
875c1439
GM
5874*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
5875USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
5876associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
5877can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
5878
133c9e59 5879*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
a933dad1
DL
5880it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
5881buffer in Emacs.
5882
133c9e59
GM
5883*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
5884use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
5885ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
5886option takes precedence.
5887
a933dad1
DL
5888** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
5889constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
5890(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
5891
5892** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
5893which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
5894the current defun.
5895
5896** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
5897following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
5898
5899** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
5900and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
5901necessary).
5902
5903** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
5904if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
5905these register values no longer become completely useless.
5906If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
5907asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
5908it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
5909
5910** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
5911example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
5912be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
5913you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
5914
5915You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
5916variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
5917file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
5918revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
5919only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
5920
5921** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
5922since it applies only to the current frame.
5923
5924** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
5925file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
5926and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
5927
5928This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
5929multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
5930variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
5931tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
5932instead of just the file you are editing.
5933
5934** RefTeX mode
5935
5936RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
5937and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
5938different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
5939multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
5940turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
5941
79214ddf 5942C-c ( reftex-label
a933dad1
DL
5943 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
5944 knows which kind of label is needed.
5945
5946C-c ) reftex-reference
5947 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
5948 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
5949
5950C-c [ reftex-citation
5951 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
5952 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
5953
5954C-c & reftex-view-crossref
5955 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
5956
5957C-c = reftex-toc
5958 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
5959 can quickly jump to every section.
79214ddf 5960
a933dad1
DL
5961Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
5962commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
5963Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
5964reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
5965C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
5966
5967** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5968
5969*** Info documentation is now available.
5970
5971*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
5972both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
5973
5974*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
5975bibtex-user-optional-fields.
5976
5977*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
5978(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
5979
5980*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
5981entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
5982appropriate functions.
5983
5984*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
5985entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
5986
5987*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
5988been cleaned.
5989
5990*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
5991bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
5992
5993*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
5994shall be delimited.
5995
5996*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
5997bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
5998bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
5999
6000*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6001field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6002prefixed with `ALT'.
6003
6004*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6005bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6006formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6007documentation).
6008
6009*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6010documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6011for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6012
6013*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6014comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6015
6016*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6017alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6018signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6019
6020*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6021
6022*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6023
6024*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6025from alien sources.
6026
6027*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6028to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6029crossref entries.
6030
6031*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6032region.
6033
6034*** Added support for imenu.
6035
6036*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6037of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6038`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6039`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6040
6041*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6042from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6043
6044** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6045
30a009a5 6046** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
047f434a 6047
a933dad1
DL
6048** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6049functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6050Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6051as an argument.
6052
6053When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6054and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6055
6056** browse-url changes
6057
6058*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6059Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6060(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6061non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6062customization variables.
6063
6064*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6065
6066*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6067lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6068(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6069
6070** Changes in Ediff
6071
6072*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6073pops up the Info file for this command.
6074
6075*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6076the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6077merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6078directories).
6079
6080*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6081and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6082files in the same directory.
6083
6084*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6085The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6086related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6087
6088** Changes in Viper
6089
6090*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
79214ddf 6091*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
a933dad1
DL
6092 instead of vip-.
6093*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
79214ddf 6094*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
a933dad1
DL
6095Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6096*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6097*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6098*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6099color when Viper is in insert state.
6100*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6101Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6102viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6103
6104** Etags changes.
6105
6106*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6107default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6108Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6109variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6110not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6111
6112*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6113
6114*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6115constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6116
6117*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6118recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6119In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6120
6121*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6122C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6123recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6124methods and protocols.
6125
6126*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6127.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6128column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6129paragraph name.
6130
6131*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6132an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6133at least M times and as many as N times.
6134
6135** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6136in files has changed slightly.
6137
6138With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6139time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6140This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6141with old time-stamp-format values.
6142
6143In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6144(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6145This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6146reasons.
6147
6148In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6149natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6150fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6151(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6152time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6153specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6154
6155Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6156case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6157truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6158
6159The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6160being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6161future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6162recommended now will continue to work then.
6163
6164See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6165details.
6166
6167** There are some additional major modes:
6168
6169dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6170m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6171meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6172
6173** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6174copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6175into Emacs.
6176
6177** New Lisp packages include:
6178
6179*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6180
6181*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6182be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6183
6184*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6185
6186*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6187in shell buffers.
6188
6189*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6190See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6191and `elint-defun'.
6192
6193*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6194meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6195ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6196strings or comments.
6197
6198These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6199abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6200you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6201insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6202at these points.
6203
6204*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6205can visit them by short forms of their names.
6206
6207*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6208Emacs Lisp function at point.
6209
6210*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6211
6212*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6213switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6214
6215*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6216
6217*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6218
6219*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6220
6221*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6222from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6223
6224*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6225You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6226inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6227original place after inserting the copy.
6228
6229*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6230on the buffer.
6231
6232You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6233velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6234(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6235
6236Enable mouse-drag with:
6237 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6238-or-
6239 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6240
6241*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6242mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6243
6244*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6245It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6246
6247*** ogonek
6248
6249The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6250Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6251platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6252TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6253ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6254prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6255instance) and vice versa.
6256
6257To use this package load it using
6258 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6259Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
79214ddf 6260 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
a933dad1
DL
6261 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6262The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6263ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6264
6265*** Interface to ph.
6266
6267Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6268
6269The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6270services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6271these servers.
6272
6273*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6274
6275*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6276You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6277while the real cursor does not move.
6278
6279*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6280for visiting your favorite web sites.
6281
6282*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6283so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6284
6285** movemail change
6286
6287Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6288mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6289supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6290user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6291
6292This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6293\f
6294* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6295
6296** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6297
6298Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6299end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6300Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6301file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6302file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6303
6304To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6305C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6306coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6307specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6308LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6309save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6310\f
6311* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6312
6313** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6314Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6315vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6316Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6317
6318** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6319to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6320
6321In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6322don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6323"win".
6324
6325** Basic Lisp changes
6326
6327*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6328evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6329
6330*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6331be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6332or by the user.
6333
6334The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
6335
6336*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
6337
6338(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
6339(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
6340
6341*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
6342usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
6343its argument.
6344
6345*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
6346
6347*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
6348
6349*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
6350
6351*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
6352error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
6353include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
6354`format' function.
6355
6356*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
6357or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
6358whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
6359
6360*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
6361either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
6362adding one of these suffixes.
6363
6364*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
6365which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
79214ddf 6366If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
a933dad1
DL
6367
6368We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
6369because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
6370
6371*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
6372
6373*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
6374You must load the `cl' library to define it.
6375
6376*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
6377conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
6378
6379 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
6380
6381BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
6382BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
6383
6384*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
6385choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
6386restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
6387works using `save-current-buffer'.
6388
6389*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
6390write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
6391of the last form.
6392
6393*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
6394which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
6395last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
6396as the last form.
6397
6398*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
6399characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
6400matches.
6401
6402For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
6403
6404*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
6405with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
6406Then it returns that string.
6407
6408For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
6409
6410(with-output-to-string
6411 (princ "The buffer is ")
6412 (princ (buffer-name)))
6413
6414returns "The buffer is foo".
6415
6416** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
6417is non-nil.
6418
6419These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
6420buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
6421characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
6422
6423*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
6424a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
6425
6426Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
6427character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
6428Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
6429position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
6430characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
6431 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
6432
6433ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
6434Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
6435non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
6436characters".
6437
6438The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
6439through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
6440"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
6441range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
6442leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
6443
6444*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
6445(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
6446multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
6447character, which may be more than one buffer position.
6448
6449This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
6450always one buffer position, need to be changed.
6451
6452However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
79214ddf 6453
a933dad1
DL
6454*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
6455because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
6456have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
6457the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
6458guaranteed.
6459
6460*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
6461between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
6462character).
6463
6464When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
6465
6466 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
6467 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
6468 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
6469 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
6470 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
6471
6472*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
6473
6474*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
6475`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
6476more than the number of characters.
6477
6478You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
6479it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
6480\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
6481is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
6482follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
6483newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
6484
6485*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
6486and returns a string containing those characters.
6487
6488*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
6489(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
6490counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
6491character, sref signals an error.
6492
6493*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
6494in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
6495string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6496
6497*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
6498in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
6499region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6500
6501*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
6502the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
6503to a vector of the characters in it.
6504
6505*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
6506of a string. You call it as follows:
6507
6508 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
6509
6510This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
6511STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
6512This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
6513Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
6514it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
6515
6516*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
6517if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6518
6519*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
6520if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6521
6522*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
6523to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
6524not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
6525which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
6526
6527(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
6528
6529This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
6530
6531The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
6532If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
6533are not included in the resulting value.
6534
6535The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
6536at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
6537WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
6538is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
6539
6540If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
6541place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
6542character extends across that column), then the padding character
6543PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
6544string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
6545column START-COLUMN.
6546
6547*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
6548the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
6549necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
6550difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
6551changed text, before the change.
6552
6553*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
6554sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
6555one character set for each script, not for each language.
6556
6557**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
6558
6559**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
6560
6561**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
6562set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
6563
6564**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
6565name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
6566which identify the character within that character set.
6567
6568**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
6569byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
6570opposite of split-char.
6571
6572**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
6573of all the characters between BEG and END.
6574
6575**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
6576of all the characters in a string.
6577
6578*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
6579and specifying coding systems.
6580
6581**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
6582system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
6583of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
6584(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
6585and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
6586as what to do about code conversion.)
6587
6588**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
6589name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
6590
6591**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6592for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6593except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
6594
6595Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6596which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
6597to match against a file name.
6598
6599VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6600a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6601decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6602to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6603systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6604specifies the coding system for encoding.
6605
6606If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6607or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6608
6609**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
6610the coding system to use for network sockets.
6611
6612Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6613which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
6614either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
6615service names.
6616
6617VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6618a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6619decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6620to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6621systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6622specifies the coding system for encoding.
6623
6624If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6625or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6626
6627**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6628for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6629except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
6630start the subprocess.
6631
6632**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
6633systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
6634when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
6635(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
6636to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
6637
6638**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
6639coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
6640subprocess.
6641
6642It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
6643but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
6644start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
6645connection permanently or until overridden.
6646
6647The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
6648file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
6649network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
6650coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
6651It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
6652system for one operation at a time.
6653
6654**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
6655files, subprocesses or network connections.
6656
6657**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
6658coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
6659The value is a cons cell,
6660 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
6661where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
6662the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
6663input to the subprocess.
6664
6665**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
6666change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
6667
6668** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
6669customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
6670you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
6671
6672You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
6673variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
6674information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
6675legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
6676customization.
6677
6678Thus, instead of writing
6679
6680 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
6681 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
6682
6683you would now write this:
6684
6685 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
6686 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
6687 :type 'boolean
6688 :group foo)
6689
6690The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
6691two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
6692describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
6693for a description of them.
6694
6695The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
6696should belong to. You define a new group like this:
6697
6698 (defgroup ispell nil
6699 "Spell checking using Ispell."
6700 :group 'processes)
6701
6702The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
6703group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
6704but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
6705to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
6706second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
6707
6708Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
6709package should have just one group; a more complex package should
6710have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
6711package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
6712first-level subgroups.
6713
6714** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
6715
6716This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
6717separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
6718
6719** easy-mmode
6720
6721The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
6722developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
6723only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
6724predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
6725`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
6726`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
6727
6728** Text property changes
6729
6730*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
6731text property.
6732
6733*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
6734previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
6735place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
6736functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
6737starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
6738
6739If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
6740LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
6741of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
6742position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
6743
6744*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
6745value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
6746is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
6747
6748** Changes in invisibility features
6749
6750*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
6751hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
6752is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
6753should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
6754would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
6755make the overlay visible.
6756
6757During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
6758invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
6759needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
6760which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
6761the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
6762t when it should hide it.
6763
6764*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
6765
6766Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
79214ddf
FP
6767invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
6768and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
a933dad1 6769Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
79214ddf 6770manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
a933dad1
DL
6771Here is an example of how to do this:
6772
6773 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
79214ddf 6774 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
a933dad1 6775 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
79214ddf 6776 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
a933dad1
DL
6777
6778 ...
6779 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
6780
6781 ...
6782 ;; When done with the overlays:
6783 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
6784 ;; Or respectively:
6785 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
6786
6787** Changes in syntax parsing.
6788
6789*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
6790`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
6791obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
6792`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
6793
6794If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
6795is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
6796used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
6797
6798When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
6799character in the buffer is calculated thus:
6800
6801 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
6802 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
6803
6804 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
6805 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
6806 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
6807
6808 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
6809 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
6810 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
6811 determine the syntax type of the character.
6812
6813 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
6814 of the current buffer.
6815
6816*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
6817value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
6818for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
6819
6820*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
6821and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
6822only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
6823character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
6824another character with the same code (unless quoted).
6825
6826These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
6827text property.
6828
6829*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
6830arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
6831of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
6832
6833*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
6834(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
6835element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
6836nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
6837string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
6838
6839*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
6840syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
6841`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
6842
6843** Changes in face features
6844
6845*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
6846if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
6847
6848*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
6849of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
6850
6851*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
6852set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
6853
6854*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
6855set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
6856
6857*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
6858by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
6859and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
6860the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
6861overlay property).
6862
6863This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
6864arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
6865
6866** Changes in file-handling functions
6867
6868*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
6869directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
6870they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
6871is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
6872
6873This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
6874begins with ~.
6875
6876*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
6877it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
6878
6879*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
6880the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
6881
6882*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
6883as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
6884
6885*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
6886character code conversion as well as other things.
6887
6888Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
6889(formerly it did not).
6890
6891*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
6892environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
6893
6894*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
6895instead of constant strings.
6896
6897*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
6898to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
6899any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
6900
6901substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
6902in the same way as before.
6903
6904*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
6905The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
6906which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
6907
6908*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
6909error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
6910else, and returns nil.
6911
6912*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
6913directory cannot be listed.
6914
6915** Changes in minibuffer input
6916
6917*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
6918read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
6919additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
6920argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
6921ways:
6922
6923 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
6924 It is available through the history command M-n.
6925
6926*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
6927read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
6928argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
6929minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
6930enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
6931
6932In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
6933argument in this way.
6934
6935*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
6936from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
6937minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
6938
6939** Echo area features
6940
6941*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
6942echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
6943minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
6944after the echo area is cleared.
6945
6946*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
6947in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
6948
6949** Keyboard input features
6950
6951*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
6952set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
6953
6954*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
6955received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
6956by keyboard macros.
6957
6958** Frame-related changes
6959
6960*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
6961creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
6962hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
6963
6964*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
6965the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
6966has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
6967
6968*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6969selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
6970value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
6971in the selected frame.
6972
6973*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
6974is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
6975which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
6976
6977** X Windows features
6978
6979*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
6980x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
6981x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
6982
6983*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
6984The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
6985
6986*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
6987MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
6988A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
6989
6990If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
6991it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
6992
6993** Subprocess features
6994
6995*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
6996functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
6997automatically.
6998
6999*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7000and returns the output from the command as a string.
7001
7002*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7003and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7004
7005** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7006does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7007
7008** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7009at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7010goes after the other menu items.
7011
7012** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
79214ddf 7013of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
a933dad1
DL
7014around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7015are in use.
7016
7017The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7018series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7019
7020Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7021after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7022form.
7023
7024** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7025is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7026but its hook is still run.
7027
7028** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7029for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7030
7031If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7032regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7033useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7034
7035This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7036are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7037filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7038warned.
7039
7040** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7041way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7042
7043** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7044integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7045functions like display-time.
7046
7047** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7048name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7049
7050** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7051can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7052is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7053
7054** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7055if there is an error in compilation.
7056
7057** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7058switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7059argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7060they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7061
7062** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7063Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7064the *scratch* buffer.
7065
7066** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7067The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7068where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7069e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7070
7071** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7072and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7073It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7074
7075** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7076using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7077variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7078and compose-mail-other-frame.
7079
7080** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7081can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7082full name of the specified user will be returned.
7083
7084** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7085of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7086where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7087in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7088option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7089files at all.
7090
7091** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7092and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7093width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7094the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7095
7096For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7097minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7098with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7099is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7100
7101** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7102
7103** imenu.el changes.
7104
7105You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
79214ddf 7106item from menu created by imenu.
a933dad1
DL
7107
7108An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7109#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7110select one of those items.
7111\f
7112* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7113\f
7114* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7115
7116** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7117mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7118
7119** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7120use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7121Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7122\f
7123* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7124
7125** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7126To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7127
7128** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7129conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7130matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7131expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7132word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7133all caps.
7134
7135** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7136at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7137
7138When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7139does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7140as in previous Emacs versions.
7141
7142** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7143non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7144time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7145frames.
7146
7147** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7148if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7149This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7150Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7151accident.
7152
7153** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7154keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7155It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7156line and then executing the macro.
7157
7158This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7159
7160** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7161(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7162characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7163characters.
7164
7165** Font Lock mode
7166
7167*** Font Lock support modes
7168
7169Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7170below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7171hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7172to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7173Font Lock mode is enabled.
7174
7175For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7176
7177 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7178
7179in your ~/.emacs.
7180
7181*** lazy-lock
7182
7183The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7184only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7185becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7186Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7187occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7188buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7189Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7190
7191To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7192
7193 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7194
7195To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7196
7197** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7198
7199*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7200paren and key.
7201
7202*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7203supported.
7204
7205** Gnus changes.
7206
7207Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7208commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7209significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7210previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7211
7212Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7213between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7214
79214ddf 7215*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
a933dad1
DL
7216variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7217obsolete.
7218
7219*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7220missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7221
7222 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7223
7224*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7225
7226 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7227
7228*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
79214ddf 7229referred.
a933dad1
DL
7230
7231*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7232
7233 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7234
7235*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7236
7237 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7238
7239*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
79214ddf 7240buffers.
a933dad1
DL
7241
7242 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7243
7244*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7245
7246 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7247
7248*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7249
7250 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7251
7252*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7253
7254 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7255
7256*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7257is possible.
7258
7259 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7260
7261*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7262groups of groups.
7263
7264*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7265
7266*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
79214ddf 7267batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
a933dad1
DL
7268
7269*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7270
7271*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7272
7273*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7274
7275 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7276
7277*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7278expiration times.
7279
7280*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7281
7282*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7283process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7284
7285*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7286articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7287bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7288
7289*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7290articles with the `*' command.
7291
7292*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7293
7294*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7295
7296 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7297
7298*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7299
79214ddf 7300*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
a933dad1
DL
7301`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7302
7303*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
79214ddf 7304buffer.
a933dad1
DL
7305
7306*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7307
7308*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7309
7310*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7311
7312 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7313
79214ddf 7314*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
a933dad1
DL
7315
7316 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7317
79214ddf 7318*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
a933dad1
DL
7319
7320*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7321
79214ddf 7322*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
a933dad1 7323
79214ddf 7324 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
a933dad1
DL
7325 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7326
7327*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
79214ddf 7328refetching.
a933dad1
DL
7329
7330 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7331
7332*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7333buffer to allow easier treatment.
7334
7335*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
7336
7337*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
7338
7339 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
7340
7341*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
79214ddf 7342articles.
a933dad1
DL
7343
7344 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
7345
79214ddf 7346*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
a933dad1
DL
7347
7348*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
7349cited text to hide is now customizable.
7350
7351 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
7352
7353*** Boring headers can be hidden.
7354
7355 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
7356
7357*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
7358
7359*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
7360
7361The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
7362in greater detail.
7363\f
7364* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
7365
7366** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
7367second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
7368asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
7369exists.
7370
7371** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
7372as well as lists.
7373
7374** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
7375of a given keymap.
7376
7377** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
7378given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
7379keymap or nil.
7380
7381** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
7382an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
7383name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
7384menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
7385equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
7386alias.
7387\f
7388* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
7389
7390** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
7391
7392Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
7393This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
7394was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
7395far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
7396pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
7397
7398For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
7399you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
7400`http://www.vtw.org/'.
7401
7402** A note about C mode indentation customization.
7403
7404The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
7405do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
7406It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
7407much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
7408chapter of the manual for details.
7409
7410However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
7411customization variables take effect.
7412
7413** Marking with the mouse.
7414
7415When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
7416highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
7417using M-x transient-mark-mode.
7418
7419** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
7420
7421*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
7422
7423*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
7424to work on NT only and not on 95.)
7425
7426*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
7427in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
7428you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
7429application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
7430applications, these problems are significant.
7431
7432If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
7433likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
7434However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
7435will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
7436other DOS application as a subprocess.
7437
7438Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
7439You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
7440
7441If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
7442subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
7443have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
7444Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
7445separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
7446Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
7447
7448** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
7449
7450This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
7451which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
7452minibuffer contains.
7453
7454** `title' frame parameter and resource.
7455
7456The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
7457It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
7458It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
7459affects just the displayed title of the frame.
7460
7461The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
7462it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
7463and also serves as the default for the displayed title
7464when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
7465
7466** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
7467enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
7468
7469** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
7470F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
7471Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
7472
7473If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
7474menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
7475something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
7476the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
7477
7478 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
7479
7480** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
7481to replace the characters it "deletes".
7482
7483** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
7484
7485** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
7486a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
7487select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
7488It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
7489immediately after the selected one.
7490
7491This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
7492made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
7493
7494** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
7495
7496Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
7497directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
7498If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
7499Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
7500recover-session.
7501
7502You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
7503auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
7504will not work.
7505
7506Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
7507normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
7508this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
7509bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
7510now that the bug is fixed.
7511
7512** Changes to Version Control (VC)
7513
7514There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
7515when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
7516Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
7517which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
7518
7519If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
7520telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
7521VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
7522the link is visited and a warning displayed.
7523
7524** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
7525Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
7526is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
7527
7528There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
7529Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
7530enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
7531The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
7532remain normal.
7533
7534** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
7535header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
7536
7537Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
7538known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
7539offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
7540Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
7541
7542Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
7543of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
7544a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
7545name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
7546documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
7547`mail-directory-stream'.)
7548
7549** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
7550skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
7551characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
7552with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
7553
7554Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
7555- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
7556wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
7557
7558The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
7559less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
7560headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
7561Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
7562Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
7563fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
7564to a limitation in font-lock).
7565
7566External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
7567
7568** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
7569buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
7570buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
7571this example:
7572
7573 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
7574 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
7575
7576** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7577
7578*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
7579
7580*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
7581
7582*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
7583
7584*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
7585entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
7586will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
7587isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
7588(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
7589The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
7590
7591*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
7592does the same job.
7593
7594*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
7595"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
7596
7597*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
7598text.
7599
7600** Font Lock mode
7601
7602*** Global Font Lock mode
7603
7604Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
7605new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
7606font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
7607turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
7608on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
7609
7610For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
7611
7612 (global-font-lock-mode t)
7613
7614in your ~/.emacs.
7615
7616*** Local Refontification
7617
7618In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
7619However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
7620those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
7621command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
7622
7623In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
7624(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
7625current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
7626above and below point.
7627
7628With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
7629
7630** Follow mode
7631
7632Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
7633buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
7634side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
7635they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
7636split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
7637follow-mode.
7638
7639M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
7640
7641To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
7642command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
7643
7644** hide-show changes.
7645
7646The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
7647to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
7648normal hooks.
7649
7650** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
7651The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
7652
7653** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
7654recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
7655those that begin a function, record, or macro.
7656
7657** MSDOS Changes
7658
7659*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
7660Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
7661
7662*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
7663and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
7664
7665*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
7666
7667*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
7668pressing both mouse buttons.
7669
7670*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
7671restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
79214ddf 7672are:
a933dad1
DL
7673
7674**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
7675now works.
7676
7677**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
7678
7679**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
7680implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
7681
7682**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
7683
7684**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
7685
7686**** `M-x recover-session' works.
7687
7688**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
7689
7690**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
7691\f
7692* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
7693
7694** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
7695tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
7696remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
7697this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
7698behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
7699
7700** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
7701
7702The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
7703not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
7704need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
7705be different.
7706
7707It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
7708than `system-type'.
7709
7710See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
7711
7712** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
7713now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
7714
7715** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
7716that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
7717
7718** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
7719no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
7720reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
7721
7722The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
7723to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
7724like this:
7725
7726 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
7727
7728SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
7729It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
7730becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
7731
7732REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
7733seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
7734means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
7735
7736*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
7737up if too much time passes.
7738
7739 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
7740
7741This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
7742If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
7743of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
7744form in BODY.
7745
7746*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
7747a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
7748call looks like this:
7749
7750 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
7751
7752SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
7753runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
7754timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
7755ARGS.
7756
7757Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
7758command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
7759command.
7760
7761REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
7762time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
7763does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
7764each time Emacs becomes idle.
7765
7766If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
7767idle for SECS seconds.
7768
7769*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
7770all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
7771programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
7772instead.
7773
7774*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
7775there is no answer within a certain time.
7776
7777 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
7778
7779asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
7780within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
7781Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
7782
7783** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
7784arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
7785meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
7786arguments in between are ignored.
7787
7788This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
7789the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
7790
7791** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
7792/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
7793/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
7794site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
7795version.
7796
7797It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
7798version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
7799for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
7800has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
7801and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
7802problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
7803
7804** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
7805.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
7806systems with limited file name syntax.
7807
7808Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
7809convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
7810for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
7811completions.el:
7812
7813(defvar save-completions-file-name
7814 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
7815 "*The filename to save completions to.")
7816
7817This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
7818depends on the operating system, because the definition of
7819convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
7820Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
7821MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
7822
7823** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
7824rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
7825minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
7826
7827** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
7828marker from its buffer position.
7829
7830** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
7831Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
7832The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
7833
7834** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
7835that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
7836condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
7837of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
7838matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
7839regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
7840
7841This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
7842errors that happen often during editing.
7843
7844** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
7845into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
7846puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
7847
7848** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
7849now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
7850
7851** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
7852a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
7853name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
7854to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
7855and not get-buffer-window.
7856
7857** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
7858calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
7859being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
7860
7861If you use this feature, you should set the variable
7862buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
7863property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
7864non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
7865are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
7866property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
7867over and over for the same text.
7868
7869** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
7870
7871*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
7872in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
7873
7874;; @(#) HEADER: text
7875;; $HEADER: text $
7876
7877in addition to the normal
7878
7879;; HEADER: text
7880
7881*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
7882checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
7883lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
7884\f
7885* For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7886
7887----------------------------------------------------------------------
7888Copyright information:
7889
404fa7d6 7890Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
7891
7892 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
7893 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
7894 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
7895 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
7896
7897 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
7898 of this document, or of portions of it,
7899 under the above conditions, provided also that they
7900 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
7901\f
7902Local variables:
7903mode: outline
7904paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
7905end: